WO2014121760A1 - Method and device for selecting network apparatus during switching - Google Patents

Method and device for selecting network apparatus during switching Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014121760A1
WO2014121760A1 PCT/CN2014/071906 CN2014071906W WO2014121760A1 WO 2014121760 A1 WO2014121760 A1 WO 2014121760A1 CN 2014071906 W CN2014071906 W CN 2014071906W WO 2014121760 A1 WO2014121760 A1 WO 2014121760A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network
access
access network
user equipment
packet data
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2014/071906
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
段小嫣
高晨亮
金辉
衣强
Original Assignee
华为终端有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为终端有限公司 filed Critical 华为终端有限公司
Publication of WO2014121760A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014121760A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/02Processing of mobility data, e.g. registration information at HLR [Home Location Register] or VLR [Visitor Location Register]; Transfer of mobility data, e.g. between HLR, VLR or external networks
    • H04W8/08Mobility data transfer
    • H04W8/082Mobility data transfer for traffic bypassing of mobility servers, e.g. location registers, home PLMNs or home agents
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/20Selecting an access point

Definitions

  • a third-generation mobile communication network is implemented according to a standard organization of the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which can be called a mobile communication network or a 3GPP network, and is currently the most widely used application.
  • Wide area mobile communication network The WLAN (Wireless Local Access Network) is widely deployed and used as a local communication network with convenient access, high speed and relatively low price. Users can use the UE (User Equipment) to access the 3GPP network or WLAN network for data services, such as accessing the Internet, downloading text/audio/video data, and so on.
  • the UE can also access the 3GPP core network through the WLAN to facilitate access to the Internet through the 3GPP core network, thereby implementing interworking between the 3GPP network and the WLAN, facilitating the 3GPP network to offload data payloads to the WLAN, and perform unified charging and QoS (Quality of Service). , quality of service) control, etc.
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • the 3GPP standard specifies that the UE passes TWAN (Trusted Wireless Access).
  • EPC evolved packet core network
  • EPC evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core
  • TWAN is based on 3GPP HSS (Home Subscriber Server) , the home subscription server) /AAA Server (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server) obtained the subscription data for the UE to select the default APN (Access Point Name).
  • the default APN is marked as "default" in the subscription data corresponding to the UE. (default) APN; when the UE registers with the network or requests to establish a packet data connection, if the UE does not provide the APN, the network side uses the default APN.
  • the UE uses when accessing through the TWAN
  • the default APN may be different from the default APN used by the UE when accessing the 3GPP, so that the PDN GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) used by the UE during TWAN access may be the PDN used by the UE when the 3GPP is accessed. GW is different; 2)
  • the PDN GW used by the UE during the TWAN access may also be the PDN used by the UE when the 3GPP accesses GW is different.
  • the non-3GPP access network by the trusted WLAN access network, and is used by the PDN GW and the 3GPP access network used by the non-3GPP access network after the UE switches to the 3GPP EPC through the non-3GPP access network.
  • the PDN GW is different. Then, the IP address used by the UE will be inconsistent before and after the handover, thereby causing the IP data stream transmission of the UE to be interrupted. Summary of the invention
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a method and apparatus for selecting a network device in a handover process, which aims to solve the problem that the IP data stream transmission is interrupted when the UE switches from the non-3GPP access network to the 3GPP access network.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for selecting a network device in a handover process, where the method includes:
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is used by the first access point name where the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, and the management is: subscription management, One or more of authentication management and location management; Selecting the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting the group indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway.
  • the data network gateway switches to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
  • the acquiring, by the first network device, the first access point that is used when the user equipment accesses a core network by using the second access network includes:
  • the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request
  • the first response message is a location Updating the response or the authentication response or the gateway update response
  • the first network device being a home subscription server or an authentication server.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first request message carries the first indication information, so that the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed by the second access network.
  • the step of sending the first response message is performed, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the indication
  • the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network; and/or the first network device determines the type of radio access technology of the user equipment by using the
  • the second access network is changed to the first access network, and the access network used by the user equipment is determined to be
  • the step of transmitting the first response message after the second access network becomes the first access network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is specifically acquired by the first network device from a second network device, where the second network device is An authentication server used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
  • the packet data network gateway used after accessing the network is specifically:
  • the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier is used as a packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the second indication information indicates that the session is used before the handover.
  • the access network is the second access network or the access network indicating the use of the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network, the handover request message and/or the A response message carries the second indication information.
  • the acquiring, by using the first access network, the user equipment accessing the core network by using the second access network is specifically:
  • the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation of the first aspect, or the third possible implementation of the first aspect The fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in combination with the sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the seventh possible implementation manner
  • the switching request message carries the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, so that the first network device is configured according to the first
  • the request message acquires an identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name.
  • the access network sent by the receiving user equipment is used to switch the access network used by the session from the second access network to the first access network.
  • the method further includes: before the step of acquiring the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name, after the step of the handover request message, the method further includes:
  • the second packet data network gateway After receiving the message that the second packet data network gateway sends a session failure or a handover failure, performing the obtaining, by the first network device, the first packet data corresponding to the first access point name. The step of identifying the network gateway.
  • the first response message is specifically configured by the first network device Send:
  • the point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different.
  • the identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a method for selecting a network device in a handover process, where the method includes:
  • the first request message is that the third network device receives the indication sent by the user equipment to switch the access network used by the session from the second access network to the first After the handover request message of the access network is sent, the first request message is used for And obtaining, by the user equipment, an identifier of a first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, where the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway;
  • the packet data network gateway used after the session is switched to the first access network, where the first access point name is used by the user equipment when accessing the core network through the second access network.
  • the first access point name is obtained by the third network device from the handover request message or the first response message, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is the first The access point name corresponds.
  • the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request
  • the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway.
  • the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
  • the method before the step of sending the first response message to the third network device, the method further includes: determining The access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, specifically:
  • the access network is the second access network or the access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to the first access network, and the first request message carries the first An indication message; or,
  • the first access network determines that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is specifically obtained from the second network device, where the second network device is an authentication server used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is included in the first response message includes: the first response message carrying the first access point name and the first packet data network gateway logo.
  • the method further includes: carrying the first access point name in the handover request message, to carry the first request message The first access point name, according to the first access point name carried in the first request message, carrying at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message, where The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the fourth possible implementation manner, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner, before the step of sending the first response message to the third network device, also includes:
  • the access point name is different from the second access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network
  • the point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different.
  • the identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a device for selecting a network device in a handover process, where the device includes:
  • a handover request message receiving unit configured to receive a handover request message sent by the user equipment, indicating that the access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched from the second access network to the first access network; Obtaining a first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network by using the second access network;
  • a second acquiring unit configured to acquire, by the first network device, a first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network
  • the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, where the management is: one or more of subscription management, authentication management, and location management; and a selecting unit, configured to select
  • the first access point name obtained by the acquiring unit is used as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the first packet data network acquired by the acquiring unit is selected.
  • the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the gateway is switched to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
  • the second acquiring unit includes:
  • a first request message sending subunit configured to send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request that the user equipment be connected by using the second access network
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway used when entering the core network
  • a first response message receiving subunit configured to receive, after the first request message sending subunit sends the first request message, a first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message carries at least The identifier of the first packet data network gateway, where the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request
  • the first response message is a location Updating the response or the authentication response or the gateway update response
  • the first network device being a home subscription server or an authentication server.
  • the first request message carries the first indication information
  • the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, and then performing the sending the first response.
  • the first indication information indicating that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to The first access network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway acquired by the second acquiring unit is specifically acquired by the first network device from the second network device, where the second network device is the user equipment The authentication server used when the access network accesses the core network.
  • the selecting unit is specifically configured to:
  • the first access point name as a location of the user equipment Determining, by the session, the access point name used after the first access network is switched, selecting the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway as the session of the user equipment, switching to the a packet data network gateway used after the first access network, where the second indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or indicates that the session is used for access
  • the network is switched by the second access network to the first access network, and the handover request message and/or the first response message carries the second indication information.
  • the first acquiring unit is specifically configured to obtain the foregoing information from the handover request message An access point name, where the handover request message carries a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network; or, specifically, from the first network device Obtaining a first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network.
  • the handover request message is carried in the seventh possible implementation manner
  • the first access point name so that the first request message carries the first access point name
  • the first network device acquires the first request message according to the first request message.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the access point name.
  • the device before the receiving unit receives, the device further includes:
  • a session request message sending unit configured to: after the switching request message receiving unit receives the switching request message, before the second obtaining unit acquires the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, according to the user Selecting, by the device, the second access point name signed in the first access network and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network to select the second group a data network gateway, sending a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway;
  • An execution unit configured to receive, by the second packet data network gateway, a message indicating that a session failure or a handover failure is established, notify the second obtaining unit to acquire, by the first network device, the user equipment by using the second connection
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used when accessing the core network.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a device for selecting a network device in a handover process, where the device includes:
  • a first request message receiving unit configured to receive a first request message sent by the third network device, where the first request message is an access network that is sent by the third network device to receive the indication sent by the user equipment After the second access network is switched to the handover request message of the first access network, the first request message is used to request to acquire the first used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
  • An identifier of a packet data network gateway where the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway;
  • a first response message sending unit configured to send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network device Selecting a first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting packet data indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway
  • the network gateway is used as the packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to switch to the first access network, where the first access point name is An access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network, where the first access point name is used by the third network device from the handover request message or the first Obtained in the response message, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request
  • the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway.
  • the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
  • the apparatus further includes:
  • a determining unit configured to determine, before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, that an access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network .
  • the determining unit is specifically configured to:
  • the first response message sending unit Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determining, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access a network, where the first indication information indicates that an access network used by the session before handover is the second access network or an access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to The first access message, the first request message carries the first indication information; or
  • the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determining that the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, The access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is carried in the first response message is specifically acquired by the second network device, where the second network device is the user equipment An authentication server used when the second access network accesses the core network.
  • the identifier that the at least the first packet data network gateway carries in the first response message includes: the first response message carrying the first An access point name and an identification of the first packet data network gateway.
  • the switching request message carries the first access point name, so that the The first request message carries the first access point name, and carries at least the first packet data in the first response message according to the first access point name carried in the first request message.
  • An identifier of the network gateway where the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the device further includes a determining unit , specifically for:
  • the first response message sending unit Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, and the user The second access point name used by the device when accessing the core network by using the first access network is different; or Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determining, by using the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, and the user equipment The second access point name used by the first access network to access the core network is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway and the user equipment access the core network through the first access network. The identifier of the second packet data network gateway used at the time is different, and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
  • the UE when the UE switches between the access networks, the UE does not establish a connection between the UE and the new access network by assigning a new APN and a PDN GW, but obtains access through a new acquisition process.
  • the network device such as the PDN GW, used in the original access network, so that the IP address does not change after the UE switches to another access network, and the problem of interruption of the IP data stream transmission of the UE is avoided.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flow chart of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a specific method for obtaining an identifier of a packet data network gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a specific process of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another specific process of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is still another example of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. Specific process diagram;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of still another specific process of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a specific structure of the second acquiring unit in FIG. 9;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for selecting a network device in another switching process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to user equipment UE performing access switching between different access networks.
  • the selection of the network device including the packet data network gateway PDN GW, may be performed by a device having a network device selection function, such as an MME (Mobility Management Entity), which is specifically described in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • Methods include:
  • S101 Receive a handover request message that is sent by the user equipment to switch the access network used by the session of the user equipment from the second access network to the first access network.
  • the user equipment UE may be when receiving the network switching instruction of the user, or when detecting the overlay Generating and transmitting the indication when the cover signal is better than the second access network of the first access network
  • the access network used by the session of the UE is switched by the second access network to the handover request message of the first access network, where the handover request message is specifically a message for requesting network handover, for example, if the UE needs to connect from the non-3GPP
  • the handover request message may be an attach request message (attach request) sent by the UE to the corresponding MME.
  • S102 Obtain a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, and obtain, by the first network device, the user equipment to access by using the second access network.
  • the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment on the network side, such as a home subscription server HSS or an authentication server, and the management is: one of subscription management, authentication management, and location management. A variety.
  • the first network device acquires and stores the APN used by the UE and the corresponding PDN GW.
  • the first access point name may be directly obtained from the handover request message, that is, the UE may carry the user equipment through the second access network in the handover request message.
  • the first APN used when accessing the core network; that is, the first access point name may be directly reported by the user equipment.
  • the first packet data network gateway may obtain the corresponding first PDN according to the first APN to the first network device after determining the first APN of the UE. GW's logo.
  • the first network device such as an HSS, may also be obtained according to the identifier of the user equipment UE.
  • the identifier of the first PDN GW may be a first PDN GW address, or a PDN GW FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name).
  • S103 The first access point name is selected as the access point name used by the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected.
  • the packet data network gateway switches to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
  • the UE continues to access the first access network through the APN and the PDN GW used in the second access network, thereby implementing access to the core network for various types of data access, interaction, and the like.
  • the S103 may include: selecting, according to the second indication information, the first access point name as an access point name used by the session of the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network. And selecting, by the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, the second indication
  • the information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to the first access network,
  • the handover request message and/or the first response message carries the second indication information.
  • the second indication information carried in the first response message returned by the request message initiates a session establishment process.
  • the network device used when accessing the core network through the original access network before the handover is selected in the handover process is implemented by the process of the embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, During the handover process, the packet data network gateway used when accessing the core network through the original access network is selected, so that the IP address does not change after the UE switches to another access network, and the IP data flow of the UE is avoided. The problem of transmission interruption.
  • the method for obtaining an identifier of a packet data network gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention includes: S1001: Send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request to acquire a first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network. Identification
  • S1002 Receive a first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway and the first An access point name corresponds.
  • the first request message may include the identifier and/or user information of the UE and/or the first APN (directly reported by the UE) used by the UE to access the second access network, etc., to facilitate the first network such as the HSS.
  • the device can search for the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE when accessing the second access network, and return the identifier of the first PDN GW that is the discovered PDN GW identifier.
  • the UE may carry the first access point name in the handover request message, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, so that the first network device, such as the HSS, is configured according to the
  • the first request message acquires an identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway may be specifically acquired by the first network device from the second network device, where the second network device is accessed by the user equipment by using the second access network.
  • the authentication server used by the core network may also obtain the second network device, such as an AAA Server for authentication, authorization, and accounting, according to the identifier of the corresponding UE when receiving the first request message.
  • the UE accesses the PDN GW identifier used by the second access network, so that the first network device can return the identifier of the corresponding first PDN GW according to the first request message.
  • the first request message may be a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request
  • the first response message may be a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway update response corresponding to the first request message.
  • the first network device may be a home subscription server or an authentication server.
  • the first request message may be used to determine whether the access network used by the UE is switched. If yes, the identifier of the first PDN GW is obtained, and the first response message that carries the identifier of the first PDN GW is returned. This is achieved by the following steps:
  • the first request message carries the first indication information, so that the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed by the second access network.
  • the step of sending the first response message is performed, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the indication
  • the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network; and/or the first network device determines the type of radio access technology of the user equipment by using the
  • the second access network is changed to the first access network, and determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, and the sending the first response is performed.
  • the first request message may be a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first request message may carry the first indication information, indicating that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second connection Entering the network or indicating that the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network; after receiving the first request message, the first network device is configured according to the first request The first indication information carried in the message, and/or determining the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment by the second access network according to the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment stored by the first network device For the first access network.
  • the first response message is specifically sent by the first device in the following situation:
  • the point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different.
  • the identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
  • the method for obtaining the identifier of the packet data network gateway in the embodiment of the present invention may be corresponding to the acquiring, by the second network access, the user equipment from the first network device in S102 in FIG.
  • the present invention has the following advantages:
  • the handover procedure disclosed in the embodiment of the present invention can ensure that the UE continues to use the PDN GW used by the original access network to access the core network before switching, so that the IP address does not change after switching to the new access network.
  • the problem of interruption of the IP data stream transmission of the UE is avoided.
  • FIG. 3 it is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method in this embodiment specifically includes:
  • S201 Receive a handover request message that is sent by the user equipment to switch the access network used by the session of the user equipment from the second access network to the first access network.
  • S202 According to the second access point name that is subscribed by the user equipment in the first access network, and the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network.
  • the identifier selects the second packet data network gateway, and sends a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway.
  • the handover request message when receiving the handover request message, first try to obtain the second access point name of the user equipment directly from the subscription data, and directly obtain the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name. At this time, if the obtained second access point name is the same as the first access point name when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network, the identifier of the corresponding second PDN GW that may be obtained is also The first PDN GW corresponding to an APN is the same, and a session establishment request may also be initiated to establish a session and ensure that the IP transmission is not interrupted.
  • the corresponding second PDN GW cannot identify the handover request message.
  • the switching instruction causes the session establishment to fail, and then S203 described below is executed.
  • S203 Receive a message sent by the second packet data network gateway indicating that the establishment session fails or the handover fails.
  • the following S204 needs to be performed to initiate the acquisition of the first APN and the first PDN GW used by the UE to access the second access network.
  • S204 Acquire a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, and obtain, by the first network device, the user equipment accessing the core by using the second access network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the network, the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, and the management is: signing One or more of management, authentication management, and location management.
  • the first access point name is selected as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected.
  • the packet data network gateway switches to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present invention is that the access network sent by the receiving user equipment indicates that the access network used by the session is switched from the second access network to the first interface.
  • the step of the network switching request message the step of acquiring the identifiers of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name from the first network device is newly added, and the steps of S202 and S203 are newly added.
  • the S201 and the S101 are performed in the same manner, and the S204 and S205 are corresponding to the foregoing S102 and S103, and the specific implementation process is not described herein.
  • the present invention has the following advantages:
  • the handover procedure disclosed in the embodiment of the present invention can ensure that the UE is handed over to the new access network. After that, the PDN GW used when accessing the core network through the original access network before the handover is continued, so that the IP address does not change, and the problem that the IP data stream transmission of the UE is interrupted is avoided.
  • FIG. 4 it is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present invention is applied to user equipment UE accessing between different access networks.
  • the selection of the network device including the packet data network gateway PDN GW may specifically be performed by, for example, an HSS, such as a device that performs one or more management including subscription management, authentication management, and location management on the user equipment.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present invention includes:
  • the first request message sent by the third network device is received, where the first request message is that the third network device receives the indication sent by the user equipment to switch the access network used by the session from the second access network to And sending, by the first access network, a handover request message, where the first request message is used to request to obtain an identifier of the first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network.
  • the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
  • the third network device may be a network device such as an MME.
  • the user equipment UE may generate and send a corresponding indication to the user equipment when receiving the network switching instruction of the user, or when detecting that the coverage signal is better than the second access network of the first access network.
  • the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the handover request message of the first access network, where the handover request message is specifically used to request a message for performing network handover, for example, if the UE needs to switch from the non-3GPP access network.
  • the UE sends an attach request message (attach request) to the corresponding MME.
  • the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request
  • the first response message may be a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway update response
  • the first response message is A network device is a home subscription server or an authentication server.
  • S302 Send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network device selects
  • the first access point name is used as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and the packet data network indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected.
  • the gateway is used as the packet data network gateway used by the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network, where the first access point name is the user equipment through the second access network.
  • the identifier of the gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message may be information according to the identifier of the UE, the user information, or the first APN (directly reported by the UE) used by the UE to access the second access network.
  • the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE to access the second access network is searched and carried in the first response message and returned to the third network device.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is carried in the first response message may be specifically obtained from the second network device, where the second network device is the second device
  • the authentication server used when accessing the core network may also obtain the first request message, according to the identifier of the corresponding UE, to the second network device, such as the AAA Server, for performing authentication, authorization, and accounting.
  • the UE accesses the PDN GW identifier used by the first access network, so that the first network device can return the identifier of the corresponding PDN GW according to the first request message.
  • the method further includes: determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, specifically :
  • the access network is the second access network or the access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to the first access network, and the first request message carries the first An indication letter Interest; or,
  • Determining that the type of radio access technology of the user equipment is changed by the second access network to the first access network determining that an access network used by the user equipment is changed by the second access network The first access network.
  • the corresponding first packet data network gateway is obtained, or information such as the first APN is further acquired. And transmitting, in the first response message, the first PND GW and the first APN to the third network device.
  • the method for obtaining the first PND GW and the first APN may be: carrying the first access point name in the handover request message, so that the first request message carries the first The access point name, according to the first access point name carried in the first request message, carrying at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message, the first packet The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the first response message is specifically sent by the first device in the following situation:
  • the point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different.
  • the identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
  • the present invention has the following advantages:
  • the handover procedure disclosed in the embodiment of the present invention can ensure that the UE continues to use the PDN GW used when accessing the core network through the original access network before switching, after the handover to the new access network, thereby The IP address does not change, and the problem of interruption of the IP data stream transmission of the UE is avoided.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a specific process of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to handover of a UE from a non-3GPP TWAN to a 3GPP access network, where the MME is a third network device, and the HSS is a first network device, and the TWAN is a second access network, 3GPP.
  • the E-UTRAN of the access network is the first access network.
  • the method specifically includes:
  • the UE is connected to the trusted wireless access network TWAN.
  • the UE may establish a PMIPv6 (Proxy Mobile IPv6) or a GTP (GPRS Tunnel Protocol) tunnel through the S2a interface between the PDN GW and the TWAN serving the UE to implement the UE and the TWAN.
  • PMIPv6 Proxy Mobile IPv6
  • GTP GPRS Tunnel Protocol
  • the UE detects an E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) and decides to switch the current session from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the user may set the UE to access the core network preferentially through the E-UTRAN in advance. Therefore, when the UE detects the coverage signal corresponding to the E-UTRAN, the process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN is initiated. Of course, the UE may initiate a process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN when the UE detects that the current E-UTRAN signal coverage is good.
  • E-UTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • the UE initiates an attach request Attach Request to the MME, where the handover indication Handover indication may be carried to indicate that the access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched from the second access network TWAN to the first access network E-UTRAN .
  • the receiving the request message sent by the user equipment may be an attach request sent by the UE to the MME in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be another access network used to indicate the session of the user equipment. Switching from the second access network, such as TWAN, to the first access network, such as E-UTRAN request.
  • the MME sends a signaling to the HSS to authenticate the UE, that is, the authentication operation includes determining whether the UE is a subscription user, and performing the following S5 after the authentication is passed.
  • the MME sends an update location request Update Location Request to the HSS.
  • the request message includes a RAT (Radio Access Technology) type, an MME identity, and the like that the UE currently accesses the network, to update the location information of the UE.
  • the radio access technology type RAT of the current access network is E-UTRAN.
  • the update location request is further used to request the subscription data corresponding to the UE, and specifically includes information such as the subscribed APN and the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN.
  • the first request message sent to the first network device may be the update location request sent by the MME to the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used to request the HSS to acquire the UE.
  • the first indication information that is carried in the first request message may be specifically the RAT type of the UE currently accessing the network carried in the update location request message.
  • the HSS determines that the access network of the UE is changed from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN according to the pre-handover access network information of the locally stored UE, and the RAT in the update location request is E-UTRAN, and may further determine that the UE passes
  • the APN used by the TWAN access is different from the APN accessed by the E-UTRAN.
  • the APN used by the UE through the WLAN access may be a default APN or other APN (ie, a non-default APN).
  • the HSS replies to the MME with an update location acknowledgment message Update Location ACK, where the message may include the access point name APN used by the UE when accessing the core network through the TWAN, and the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN when accessing the core network through the TWAN. Identification, access network information and other information before switching. Specifically, the UE included in the message is used by the TWAN access network.
  • the access point name APN may be one or more, including at least a default APN used by the UE to access the network through the TWAN; thus, the message includes an identifier of the PDN GW corresponding to each APN.
  • the PDN GW identifier may be a PDN GW address, or a PDN GW FQDN.
  • the identifier of the PDN GW is used as a PDN GW address.
  • the PDN GW address may be an IP address of the PDN GW.
  • the information of the access network before the handover may include information such as the type of the previous radio access technology.
  • the received first response message sent by the first network device may be an update location confirmation message sent by the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be other response messages for responding to the request of S5.
  • the information such as the access point name APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN may be carried.
  • the second indication information carried in the first response message may be the pre-switching access network information carried in the first response message.
  • the MME does not provide the APN in the attach request, and the MME selects the information of the access network in the update location confirmation message, for example, the information of the previous radio access technology type is TWAN, and selects the UE in the TWAN access in the update location confirmation message.
  • the PDN GW indicated by the identifier of the PDN GW used by the default APN used by the network and its corresponding UE when accessing the core network through the TWAN is used as the APN and PDN GW used after the current session of the UE is switched to the E-UTRAN.
  • S9 to S21 are the session establishment procedures initiated after the MME obtains the first APN and its corresponding first PDN GW identifier.
  • the MME sends a setup session request to the S-GW (Serving Gateway).
  • the request message includes the APN selected in step S8 and the address, handover indication, and other information of the corresponding PDN GW.
  • S10 The S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW according to the PDN GW address in the step S9, where the message includes a handover indication and other information.
  • Sl l If PCC (Policy and Charging Control) is used in the network, the PDN GW initiates IP to the PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) based on the handover indication.
  • PCC Policy and Charging Control
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • the CAN (Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network) session 4 tampering process is performed to obtain the QoS policy and charging rules of the session after the UE switches to the new access network E-UTRAN.
  • the PDN GW sends a setup session response to the S-GW.
  • the PDN GW allocates the same IP address (that is, used by the TWAN access network) to the UE before the handover (including IPv4).
  • the address, or IPv6 prefix is carried in the setup session response message.
  • the S-GW sends a setup session response to the MME, where the IP address of the UE is carried.
  • S 14 The UE establishes a radio access bearer through the E-UTRAN.
  • S15 The MME sends a modify bearer request Modify Bearer Request to the S-GW, where the handover indication is carried.
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer request to the PDN GW, so that the PDN GW transfers the packet data from the TWAN access system to the E-UTRAN, and immediately starts sending packet data to the S-GW.
  • the PDN GW sends a modify bearer response Modify Bearer Response to the S-GW.
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer response to the MME.
  • S19 The UE starts transmitting and receiving data through the E-UTRAN.
  • the PDN GW initiates a resource release process to the TWAN access network to release the corresponding bearer resource of the TWAN access.
  • FIG. 6 is another schematic flowchart of another method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to handover of a UE from a non-3GPP TWAN to a 3GPP access network, where the MME is a third network device, and the HSS is a first network device, and the TWAN is a second access network, 3GPP.
  • the E-UTRAN of the access network is the first access network.
  • the method specifically includes:
  • the UE is connected to the trusted wireless access network TWAN.
  • the UE may establish a PMIPv6 (Proxy Mobile IPv6) or a GTP (GPRS Tunnel Protocol) tunnel through the S2a interface between the PDN GW and the TWAN serving the UE to implement the UE and the TWAN.
  • PMIPv6 Proxy Mobile IPv6
  • GTP GPRS Tunnel Protocol
  • the UE detects the E-UTRAN and decides to switch the current session from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the user may set the UE to access the core network preferentially through the E-UTRAN in advance. Therefore, when the UE detects the coverage signal corresponding to the E-UTRAN, the process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN is initiated. Of course, when the UE detects that the current E-UTRAN signal coverage is good, the UE initiates a process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN.
  • the UE initiates an attach request to the MME, and the message may carry a handover indication Handover indication, an access network information before handover, and other information.
  • the receiving the request message sent by the user equipment may be an attach request sent by the UE to the MME in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be another access network used to indicate the session of the user equipment.
  • the second indication information carried by the handover request message may be in the attach request message.
  • the handover indication and/or the information about the access network before the handover may be used as the other access network for indicating the use of the session before the handover, or the connection to the session.
  • the access network is switched by the second access network to the information of the first access network.
  • the MME sends a signaling to the HSS to authenticate the UE, that is, the authentication operation includes determining whether the UE is a subscription user, and performing the following S5 after the authentication is passed.
  • the MME sends an update location request Update Location Request to the HSS, where the message includes the RAT type of the current access network, the MME identity, and the like, to update the location information of the UE.
  • the RAT type of the current access network is E-UTRAN.
  • the update location request is further used to request subscription data corresponding to the UE, and specifically includes information such as the signed APN and the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN.
  • the MME does not provide the APN in the attach request.
  • the MME carries an indication, such as a handover indication or an indication of handover from the WLAN, in the update location request according to the handover indication and the previous radio access technology type information in the attach request.
  • an indication such as a handover indication or an indication of handover from the WLAN, in the update location request according to the handover indication and the previous radio access technology type information in the attach request.
  • the HSS In order for the HSS to return the APN used by the UE to access the network through the WLAN according to this indication.
  • the first request message sent to the first network device may be the update location request sent by the MME to the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used to request the HSS to acquire the UE.
  • the first indication information that is carried in the first request message may be a handover indication carried in the update location request message or an indication of handover from the WLAN, so that the HSS returns the UE to access the network through the WLAN according to the indication.
  • the APN used.
  • the HSS determines that the access network of the UE is changed from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN, and the APN used by the UE through the WLAN access is different from the APN accessed by the 3GPP. Specifically, the UE passes the specific: the HSS may determine, according to the pre-handover access network information of the locally stored UE, the RAT in the update location request is E-UTRAN, and determine that the access network of the UE is changed from WLAN to E-UTRAN; and/or, according to the indication carried in the update location request, such as the handover indication or the indication of handover from the WLAN, according to S5, determining that the access network of the UE is changed from WLAN to E-UTRAN.
  • the HSS replies to the MME with an update location confirmation message Update Location ACK.
  • the update location confirmation message carries the APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the PDN GW identifier used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN.
  • the access point name APN used by the UE in the update location confirmation message to access the network through the TWAN may be one or more, where at least the default APN used by the UE to access the network through the TWAN is included;
  • the PDN GW identifier may be a PDN GW address or a PDN GW FQDN.
  • the identifier of the PDN GW is a PDN GW address.
  • the received first response message sent by the first network device may be an update location confirmation message sent by the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be other response messages for responding to the request of S5.
  • the information such as the access point name APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN may be carried.
  • the MME selects the default APN used by the UE in the update location confirmation message to access the network through the trusted WLAN, according to the handover indication in the attach request and/or the access network information before the handover.
  • the PDN GW indicated by the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE and the corresponding UE to access the core network through the TWAN is used as the APN and the PDN GW used after the current session of the UE is switched to the E-UTRAN.
  • S9 to S21 are the session establishment procedures initiated after the MME obtains the first APN and its corresponding first PDN GW identifier.
  • S9 The MME sends a setup session request Create Session Request to the S-GW, where the message includes the APN determined in S8 and the address of the corresponding PDN GW, the handover indication, and other information. Interest.
  • S10 The S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW according to the PDN GW address in S9, where the message includes a handover indication and other information.
  • PCC Policy and Charging Control
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • the PDN GW sends a setup session response to the S-GW.
  • the PDN GW allocates the same IP address (that is, used by the TWAN access network) to the UE before the handover (including IPv4).
  • the address, or IPv6 prefix is carried in the setup session response message.
  • S13 The S-GW sends a setup session response to the MME, where the IP address of the UE is carried.
  • S15 The MME sends a modify bearer request Modify Bearer Request to the S-GW, where the handover indication is carried.
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer request to the PDN GW, so that the PDN GW transfers the packet data from the TWAN access system to the E-UTRAN, and immediately starts sending packet data to the S-GW.
  • the PDN GW sends a modify bearer response Modify Bearer Response to the S-GW.
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer response to the MME.
  • S19 The UE starts transmitting and receiving data through the E-UTRAN.
  • the PDN GW initiates a resource release process to the TWAN access network to release the TWAN connection. Enter the corresponding bearer resource.
  • the embodiment of the present invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network, and implements the same PDN GW for the UE before and after the access network handover, thereby ensuring that the UE can use the same IP address. Conduct a session to avoid data transfer interruptions.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method in this embodiment includes the UE switching from the TWAN of the non-3GPP network to the E-UPRAN of the 3GPP network, where the MME is the third network device, and the HSS is the first network device, and wherein the 3GPP AAA is The server is the second network device, the TWAN is the second access network, and the E-UTRAN of the 3GPP access network is the first access network.
  • the method specifically includes:
  • the UE is connected to the trusted wireless access network TWAN.
  • the UE may establish a PMIPv6 (Proxy Mobile IPv6) or a GTP (GPRS Tunnel Protocol) tunnel through the S2a interface between the PDN GW and the TWAN serving the UE to implement the UE and the TWAN.
  • PMIPv6 Proxy Mobile IPv6
  • GTP GPRS Tunnel Protocol
  • the UE detects the E-UTRAN and decides to switch the current session from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the user may set the UE to access the core network preferentially through the E-UTRAN in advance. Therefore, when the UE detects the coverage signal corresponding to the E-UTRAN, the process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN is initiated. Of course, when the UE detects that the current E-UTRAN signal coverage is good, the UE initiates a process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN.
  • the UE initiates an attach (ie, registration) request to the MME, and the message may carry the handover indication, and may also carry the APN, and is used to indicate that the UE requests to establish (or switch) a PDN connection corresponding to the APN, and the APN may be the default.
  • APN or other APN ie non-default APN.
  • the receiving the request message sent by the user equipment may be the attach request sent by the UE to the MME according to the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used for indicating the use.
  • the access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched by the second access network, such as the TWAN, to the request message of the first access network, such as E-UTRAN.
  • the second indication information carried in the handover request message may specifically be the handover indication carried in the attach request, and may be another access network used to indicate the use of the session before the handover as the second An access network or information indicating that an access network used by the session is switched from the second access network to the first access network.
  • the MME sends a signaling to the HSS to authenticate the UE, that is, the authentication operation includes determining whether the UE is a subscription user, and performing the following S5 after the authentication is passed.
  • the MME sends an update location request Update Location Request to the HSS, where the message includes the RAT of the current access network, the MME identity, and the like, to update the location information of the UE.
  • the update location request message may also carry a handover indication and an APN provided by the UE in the attach request message.
  • the update location request is further used to request the subscription data corresponding to the UE, and specifically includes information such as the subscribed APN and the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN.
  • the first request message sent to the first network device may be the update location request sent by the MME to the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used to request the HSS to acquire the UE.
  • the first indication message that is carried in the first request message may be the handover indication carried in the first request message and/or the RAT type of the UE currently accessing the network.
  • the HSS determines that the access network of the UE is changed from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN, and further, it may be determined that the APN used by the UE through the WLAN access is different from the APN accessed by the 3GPP, or the UE accesses the core network through the WLAN and passes the 3GPP.
  • the APN used by the access network to access the core network is the same but the PDN GW corresponding to the APN may be different.
  • the UE connects to the default APN or other APN through the WLAN (ie, non-default)
  • the HSS can be based on the locally stored UE's pre-switching access network information, and updated.
  • the RAT in the location request is the E-UTRAN, and the access network of the UE is determined to be changed from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN.
  • the access network carried in the update location request may further be determined to change the access network of the UE from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN.
  • the HSS sends an update packet data network gateway identifier trigger message to the 3GPP AAA Server.
  • the Update PDN GW Identity Trigger is used to trigger the 3GPP AAA Server to update the identifier of the packet data network gateway used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN.
  • the packet data network gateway identifier trigger message carries the user identifier; the APN that is used by the locally stored UE to access the network through the WLAN, or the APN provided by the MME in the update location request message.
  • the user identifier in the update packet data network gateway identifier trigger message is an IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identification Number).
  • the 3GPP AAA Server sends an Update Packet Data Network Gateway Identity Request message Update PDN GW Identity Request to the HSS, where the APN carrying the UE when the TWAN access network accesses the core network and its corresponding PDN GW identifier are carried; or according to the update packet
  • the data network gateway identifies the APN in the trigger message, and carries the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN when the UE accesses the core network through the TWAN.
  • the HSS sends an update packet data network gateway identity confirmation message Update PDN GW Identity ACK to the 3GPP AAA Server.
  • the HSS replies to the MME with an update location confirmation message Update Location ACK.
  • the update location confirmation message includes the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS in step 8, and may also include an APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, where at least one APN corresponds to the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS in step S8.
  • the APN corresponding to the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS in step S8 may be the default APN used when the UE accesses the core network through the TWAN access network, or the same APN as the APN provided by the UE in the attach request. (If the UE provides an APN in the attach request).
  • the received first response message sent by the first network device may be an update location confirmation message sent by the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be other response messages for responding to the request of S5.
  • the information such as the access point name APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN may be carried.
  • the MME selects, according to the APN and the handover indication provided by the UE in the attach request, the PDN GW indicated by the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN in the update location confirmation message to access the core network through the TWAN.
  • the PDN GW used by the UE after the current session is handed over to the E-UTRAN. If the UE does not provide the APN in the attach request, the MME selects the default APN used by the UE in the update location confirmation message to access the core network through the TWAN, and the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the default APN received by the HSS in step S8.
  • the APN and PDN GW used by the UE after the current session is switched to the E-UTRAN.
  • the MME may select the APN in the E-UTRAN access network according to the operator policy. Corresponding PDN GW.
  • the PDN connection of the APN switched to the 3GPP by the WLAN will use different PDN GWs, the IP address will change, and the IP service cannot be seamlessly switched; but other benefits can be brought about, for example, avoiding the same APN using two Or additional bandwidth usage caused by multiple PDN GWs.
  • S12 to S24 are the session establishment procedures initiated after the MME obtains the first APN and its corresponding first PDN GW identifier.
  • S12 The MME sends a setup session request Create Session Request to the S-GW, where the message includes the APN and PDN GW addresses determined in the Sl, the handover indication, and other information.
  • the S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW according to the PDN GW address in the establishment session request, where the message includes a handover indication and other information.
  • the PDN GW sends a session establishment response Create Session Response to the S-GW.
  • the PDN GW allocates the same IP address (including the IPv4 address or the IPv6 prefix) that the UE uses before the handover (that is, the T4), and carries the session response message.
  • S16 The S-GW sends a setup session response to the MME, where the IP address of the UE is carried.
  • the MME sends a modify bearer request Modify Bearer Request to the S-GW, where the handover indication is carried.
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer request to the PDN GW, so that the PDN GW transfers the packet data from the TWAN access system to the E-UTRAN, and immediately starts sending packet data to the S-GW.
  • the PDN GW sends a modify bearer response Modify Bearer Response to the S-GW.
  • the S-GW sends a ⁇ ' ⁇ to the MME to change the response.
  • S22 The UE starts to send and receive data through the E-UTRAN.
  • the PDN GW initiates a resource release process to the TWAN access network to release the corresponding bearer resource of the TWAN access.
  • the MME selects a PDN GW different from the PDN GW that the WLAN accesses before the handover, for example, S11
  • the UE has established the PDN connection of the same APN in the 3GPP access network before the handover, and uses different
  • the handover request indication will not be carried in the establishment session request message.
  • Subsequent session establishment steps with existing EPS (Evolved Packet) System, Evolved Packet (Communication) System) The subsequent steps in the attach procedure for the MME to send a setup session request to the S-GW and not including the handover indication.
  • the embodiment of the present invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network, and selects the same PDN GW for the UE before and after the access network handover, thereby ensuring that the UE can use the same IP.
  • the address is in session to avoid a data transmission interruption.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of still another specific process of the method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method of this embodiment includes the UE switching from the TWAN of the non-3GPP network to the E-UPRAN of the 3GPP network, where the MME is the third network device, and the HSS is the first network device, and the 3GPP AAA Server is The second network device, the TWAN is the second access network, and the E-UTRAN of the 3GPP access network is the first access network.
  • the method specifically includes:
  • the UE is connected to the trusted wireless access network TWAN.
  • the UE may establish a PMIPv6 (Proxy Mobile IPv6) or a GTP (GPRS Tunnel Protocol) tunnel through the S2a interface between the PDN GW and the TWAN serving the UE to implement the UE and the TWAN.
  • PMIPv6 Proxy Mobile IPv6
  • GTP GPRS Tunnel Protocol
  • the UE detects the E-UTRAN and decides to switch the current session from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the user may set the UE to access the core network preferentially through the E-UTRAN in advance. Therefore, when the UE detects the coverage signal corresponding to the E-UTRAN, the process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN is initiated. Of course, when the UE detects that the current E-UTRAN signal coverage is good, the UE initiates a process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN.
  • the UE sends an attach request to the MME, and the message may carry the handover indication, and the message may also carry the APN, and the message may be used to indicate that the UE requests to establish (or switch) the handover request message sent by the receiving user equipment.
  • the embodiment of the invention An attach request sent by the UE to the MME.
  • other access networks for indicating the use of the session of the user equipment may be switched from a second access network, such as a TWAN, to a first access network, such as an E-UTRAN. Request message.
  • the second indication information may be the handover indication carried in the attach request, and may be another access network for indicating the use of the session before the handover as the second access network or indication.
  • the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network into information of the first access network.
  • the MME sends a signaling to the HSS to authenticate the UE, that is, the authentication operation includes determining whether the UE is a subscription user, and performing the following S5 after the authentication is passed.
  • the MME sends an update location request Update Location Request to the HSS, where the message includes the RAT, the MME identity, and the like of the current access network, to update the location information of the UE.
  • the HSS returns information such as subscription data to the MME. It should be noted that this step is the same as the process in which the existing MME updates the UE location and acquires the subscription data to the HSS.
  • the MME selects the PDN GW-2 according to the subscription data and the attach request of the UE, and sends a setup session request to the S-GW, where the handover indication and the address of the PDN GW-2 are carried.
  • the S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW-2, where the handover indication is carried. That is, the MME selects the second packet data according to the second access point name subscribed by the user equipment in the E-UTRAN and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the E-UTRAN. And the network gateway sends a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway.
  • the message sent by the second packet data network gateway indicating that the session establishment failure or the handover failure is performed may be specifically that the PDN GW-2 in the embodiment of the present invention sends a session establishment session to the S-GW.
  • the complex message can of course also be a message carrying the reason for the rejection or failure, indicating that the handover cannot be performed or the session is failed.
  • S9 The S-GW forwards the session reply to the MME.
  • the MME sends a gateway update request to the HSS to request a new PDN GW.
  • the gateway update request may carry an indication, such as "handover cannot be performed” or "request new PDN GW” indication, and may also carry other information, such as: user identity (ie, IMSI), APN, PDN GW-2 identity, and the like.
  • the gateway update request may be a notification request Notify Request, or another message for requesting to update the packet data network gateway to implement handover.
  • the first request message sent to the first network device may be the gateway update request sent by the MME to the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used to request the HSS to acquire the UE.
  • the first indication information carried in the first request message may be an indication of "switching cannot be performed” or "requesting a new PDN GW" in the first request message.
  • the HSS may determine that the access network of the UE is changed from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN according to the pre-handover access network information of the locally stored UE, and/or the gateway update request, and may further determine that the UE accesses through the WLAN.
  • the used APN is different from the APN accessed by the 3GPP, or the UE accessing the core network through the WLAN is the same as the APN used by the 3GPP access network to access the core network, but the PDN GW corresponding to the APN may be different.
  • the APN used by the UE through the WLAN access may be a default APN or other APN (ie, a non-default APN).
  • the PDN GW Identity Trigger which carries the user identifier (ie, IMSI), may also carry the locally stored APN used by the UE to access the network through the WLAN, or the APN provided by the MME in the notification request message in step S8.
  • the 3GPP AAA Server sends an Update PDN GW Identity Request message Update PDN GW Identity Request to the HSS, where the APN and the corresponding PDN GW identifier of the UE when the UE accesses the core network by the TWAN access network are carried, or the PDN GW identifier is updated according to the update
  • the APN in the trigger message carries the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN when the UE accesses the core network through the TWAN. That is, the identifier of the first APN and the corresponding first PDN GW.
  • the HSS replies to the MME with a gateway update response, where the message carries the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS at S13, and may also carry the APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, where at least one APN and the HSS are received in step S13.
  • the PDN GW logo corresponds.
  • the APN corresponding to the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS in step S13 may be a default APN used when the UE accesses the core network through the TWAN access network, or an APN that is the same as the APN provided by the UE in the attach request. (If the UE provides an APN in the attach request).
  • the gateway update response may be a notification response Notify Answer, or other message for providing a new packet data network gateway identifier to implement the handover.
  • the received first response message sent by the first network device may be a notification response of the HSS reply in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be another response message for responding to the request of S10, where
  • the information such as the access point name APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN may be carried.
  • S16 to S28 are the session establishment procedures initiated after the MME obtains the first APN and its corresponding first PDN GW identifier.
  • the MME selects the PDN GW-1 according to the PDN GW identifier in the notification response, and sends a setup session request to the S-GW, where the APN, the handover indication, and the address of the PDN GW-1 are carried.
  • the S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW-1, where the handover indication is carried.
  • PCC Policy and Charging Control
  • Charging Control Policy and Charging Control
  • the PDN GW-1 initiates an IP-CAN (Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network) session to the PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) 4 tampering process to obtain the QoS policy and charging rules of the session after the UE switches to the new access network E-UTRAN.
  • IP-CAN Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • the PDN GW-1 sends a session establishment response to the S-GW, Create Session Response.
  • the PDN GW-1 allocates the same IP address (including the IPv4 address or the IPv6 prefix) that the UE is used before the handover (that is, used in the TWAN access network), and carries the session response message. in.
  • S20 The S-GW sends a setup session response to the MME, where the IP address of the UE is carried.
  • S22 The MME sends a modify bearer request Modify Bearer Request to the S-GW, where the handover indication is carried.
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer request to the PDN GW, so that the PDN GW-1 transfers the packet data from the TWAN access system to the E-UTRAN, and immediately starts sending packet data to the S-GW.
  • the PDN GW sends a modify bearer response Modify Bearer Response to the S-GW.
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer response to the MME.
  • S26 The UE starts transmitting and receiving data through the E-UTRAN.
  • the PDN GW initiates a resource release process to the TWAN access network to release the corresponding bearer resource of the TWAN access.
  • the embodiment of the present invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network, and implements the same PDN GW for the UE before and after the access network handover, thereby ensuring that the UE can use the same IP address. Conduct a session to avoid data transfer interruptions.
  • the device for selecting a network device in the handover process of the embodiment of the present invention is described in detail below. Said.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the device of the embodiment of the present invention may be disposed in a device having a network device selection function, such as an MME, where the device includes:
  • the handover request message receiving unit 11 is configured to receive, by the user equipment, a handover request message indicating that the access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched from the second access network to the first access network;
  • the first obtaining unit 12 is configured to acquire a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network;
  • the second obtaining unit 13 is configured to acquire, from the first network device, a first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network.
  • the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, where the management is: one or more of subscription management, authentication management, and location management; Selecting the first access point name acquired by the acquiring unit as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and selecting the first group acquired by the acquiring unit
  • the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the data network gateway is used as a packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network.
  • the user equipment UE may generate and send a corresponding indication to the user equipment when receiving the network switching instruction of the user, or when detecting that the coverage signal is better than the second access network of the first access network.
  • the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to a handover request message of the first access network, where the handover request message is specifically used to request a message for performing network handover, and the handover request message receiving unit 11 receives the message.
  • the request message is switched, the device selection operation is performed.
  • the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment on the network side, such as a home subscription server HSS or an authentication server, and the management is: one of subscription management, authentication management, and location management. A variety.
  • a network device allocates and manages an APN allocated to the UE and a used PDN GW.
  • the first access point name obtained by the first acquiring unit 12 may be directly obtained from the handover request message, that is, the UE may carry the user equipment through the second in the handover request message.
  • the name of the first access point used by the access network to access the core network; that is, the name of the first access point may be directly reported by the user equipment.
  • the first access point name may be obtained from the first network device, and the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network may be The information such as the identifier of the device UE is obtained after requesting the search in the first network device such as the HSS.
  • the second obtaining unit 13 obtains the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, that is, the first PDN GW, and after obtaining the first APN of the UE, the second acquiring unit 13 obtains the corresponding number according to the APN to the first network device.
  • the identity of a PDN GW may also be obtained from a first network device, such as an HSS, where the identifier of the first PDN GW may be a first PDN GW address, or a PDN GW FQDN (Fully Qualified) Domain Name, full name domain name, etc.
  • the UE accesses the first access network through the APN and the PDN GW used in the second access network, thereby implementing access to the core network for various types of data access, interaction, and the like.
  • the selecting unit 14 may be configured to: select, according to the second indication information, the first access point name as the connection used by the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network. a point data name, the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected as a packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to switch to the first access network, where
  • the second indication information indicates that an access network used by the session before handover is the second access network or an access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to the first
  • the access network, the handover request message and/or the first response message carries the second indication information.
  • the second acquiring unit 13 in FIG. 9 may specifically include: a first request message sending sub-unit 131, configured to send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request that the user equipment access the core network through the second access network The identifier of the first packet data network gateway used at the time;
  • the first response message receiving sub-unit 132 is configured to receive, after the first request message sending sub-unit sends the first request message, the first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message is at least And carrying the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, where the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request
  • the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway update response
  • the first network device is a home subscription server. Or authentication server.
  • the first request message sent by the first request message sending sub-unit 131 may include the identifier or user information of the UE or the first APN (directly reported by the UE) used by the UE to access the second access network, etc., so that The first network device, such as the HSS, can search for the PDN GW identifier used by the UE when accessing the second access network, and return the found PDN GW identifier in the locally stored PDN GW identifier.
  • the first request message sent by the first request message sending sub-unit 131 carries the first indication information, so that the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, the connection used by the user equipment. Step of performing the sending of the first response message after the second access network is changed to the first access network, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is Said second access network or an access network indicating the use of said session is switched from said second access network to said first access network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway acquired by the second acquiring unit 13 is specifically acquired by the first network device from the second network device, where the second network device is the user equipment The authentication server used when the access network accesses the core network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is specifically obtained by the first network device from a second network device, where the second network device is accessed by the user equipment by using the second access network
  • the authentication server used by the core network may also obtain the first network request from the second network device, such as the AAA Server, for authentication, authorization, and accounting, according to the identifier of the corresponding UE when receiving the first request message.
  • the UE accesses the PDN GW identifier used by the first access network, so that the first network device can return the identifier of the corresponding PDN GW according to the first request message.
  • the first acquiring unit 12 is specifically configured to acquire the first access point name from the handover request message, where the handover request message carries the user equipment to access the core through the second access network.
  • the first access point name used by the network when the network device accesses the core network through the second access network is obtained from the first network device.
  • the handover request message may further carry the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, so that the first network device is configured according to the first The first request message acquires an identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name.
  • the embodiment of the present invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network.
  • the UE selects the same before and after the access network handover through a new interaction mode.
  • a PDN GW so that the UE can use the same IP address for the session to avoid the occurrence of data transmission interruption.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the device in the embodiment of the present invention may be disposed in a device having a network device selection function, such as an MME, including the foregoing handover request message receiving unit 11, the first obtaining unit 12, the second obtaining unit 13, and the selecting unit 14, and further The device further includes:
  • a session establishment message sending unit 15 configured to: after the switching request message receiving unit receives the switching request message, before the second obtaining unit acquires the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, according to the User equipment signing the second in the first access network
  • the access point name and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network select a second packet data network gateway, and send the second packet data network gateway to the second packet data network gateway Establish a session request message;
  • the executing unit 16 is configured to: after receiving the message that the second packet data network gateway sends a session failure or a handover failure, notify the second acquiring unit 13 to acquire the user equipment from the first network device by using the The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the access network to access the core network.
  • the execution unit 16 first directly obtains the PDN GW by using the setup session request message sending unit 15 described above. In the case that the session connection is unsuccessful according to the identifier of the PDN GW, the first obtaining unit 12 and the second obtaining unit 13 perform corresponding operations.
  • the UE initiates the connection establishment process of the UE to the access network by assigning a new APN and a PDN GW. After the connection establishment is unsuccessful, the UE is disclosed by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the process of obtaining the network device such as the PDN GW used in the original access network ensures that the IP address does not change after the UE switches to another access network, thereby avoiding the problem that the IP data stream transmission of the UE is interrupted.
  • FIG. 12 it is a schematic structural diagram of a device for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the device in the embodiment of the present invention may be configured in a network device that manages the user equipment, such as a home subscription server, an HSS, or an authentication server.
  • the device includes:
  • the first request message receiving unit 21 is configured to receive a first request message sent by the third network device, where the first request message is an access network that is sent by the third network device to receive the indication sent by the user equipment. Switching from the second access network to the handover request message of the first access network The first request message is used to request the identifier of the first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network, where the third network device is a selected group Network device of the data network gateway;
  • the first response message sending unit 22 is configured to send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network
  • the device selects the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selects the group indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway.
  • the data network gateway is used as the packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to switch to the first access network, where the first access point name is the user equipment through the second connection
  • the identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the third network device may be a network device such as an MME.
  • the user equipment UE may generate and send a corresponding indication to the user equipment when receiving the network switching instruction of the user, or when detecting that the coverage signal is better than the second access network of the first access network.
  • the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the handover request message of the first access network, where the handover request message is specifically used to request a message for performing network handover, for example, if the UE needs to switch from the non-3GPP access network.
  • the UE sends an attach request message (attach request) to the corresponding MME.
  • the first request message in the first request message receiving unit 21 is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request
  • the first response message may be a location update response or an authentication corresponding to the first request message.
  • the first network device is a home subscription server or an authentication server.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message may be based on the identifier of the UE, the user information, or the first APN used by the UE to access the second access network.
  • the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE to access the second access network is searched and carried in the first response message and returned to the third network device. .
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is carried in the first response message may be specifically obtained from the second network device, where the second network device is the second device
  • the authentication server used when accessing the core network may also obtain the first request message, according to the identifier of the corresponding UE, to the second network device, such as the AAA Server, for performing authentication, authorization, and accounting.
  • the UE accesses the PDN GW identifier used by the first access network, so that the first network device can return the identifier of the corresponding PDN GW according to the first request message.
  • the device further includes:
  • a determining unit 23 configured to determine, before the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response message, that an access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first interface Network access.
  • the determining unit 23 is specifically configured to: before the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response message, determine, according to the first indication information, at least the access network used by the user equipment by the second connection The access network becomes the first access network, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or an access network indicating that the session is used.
  • the first request message carries the first indication information; or, the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response Before the message, determining that the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment is changed by the second access network to the first access network, determining that the access network used by the user equipment is used by the second access The network becomes the first access network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is carried in the first response message may be obtained by the second network device, where the second network device is the second The authentication server used by the access network to access the core network.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is included in the first response message includes: the first ringtone
  • the first access point name and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway are carried in the message.
  • the handover request message may further carry the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, and is carried according to the first request message.
  • the first access point name carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is related to the name of the first access point correspond.
  • the determining unit 23 of the device is further configured to:
  • the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response message, determining, by using the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, The second access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network through the first access network is different; or
  • the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response message, determine the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network, and the user equipment
  • the second access point name used by the first access network to access the core network is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway and the user equipment access the core through the first access network
  • the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the network is different, and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
  • the network device such as the PDN GW used in the original access network can be obtained through the process disclosed in the embodiment of the present invention, and the IP address does not change after the UE switches to another access network. The problem of interruption of the IP data stream transmission of the UE is avoided.
  • a computer storage medium storing a program, the program being executed comprising an embodiment of the method corresponding to any of the above Figures 1 to 8.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present invention may be a device having a network device selection function, such as an MME.
  • the network The device includes: a transmitter 100, a receiver 200, and a processor 300, wherein the processor 300 performs the following steps:
  • the data network gateway switches to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
  • the processor 300 performs, by acquiring, by the first network device, a first packet data network corresponding to the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
  • the steps of identifying the gateway include:
  • the receiver 200 is configured to receive the first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway Corresponding to the first access point name.
  • the processor 300 controls the transmitter 100 to send a first request message to the first network device as a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message is a location update response or a reference.
  • the right response or the gateway update response, the first network device is a home subscription server or an authentication server. Further, the processor 300 further performs the following steps:
  • the first request message carries the first indication information, so that the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed by the second access network.
  • the step of sending the first response message is performed, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the indication
  • the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network; and/or the first network device determines the type of radio access technology of the user equipment by using the
  • the second access network is changed to the first access network, and determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, and the sending the first response is performed.
  • the identifier of the first packet data network gateway acquired by the processor 300 is specifically acquired by the first network device from the second network device, and the second network device is the second The authentication server used by the access network to access the core network.
  • the processor 300 performs the selecting the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting the first
  • the step of the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the packet data network gateway as the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network is specifically:
  • the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier is used as a packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the second indication information indicates that the session is used before the handover.
  • the access network is the second access network or the access network indicating the use of the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network, the handover request message and/or the A response message carries the second indication information.
  • the processor 300 performs the acquiring the user equipment by using the second
  • the name of the first access point used when the access network accesses the core network is specifically:
  • the processor 300 controls the switch request message received by the receiver 200 to carry the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, and further So that the first network device acquires an identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name according to the first request message.
  • the processor 300 performs the step of transmitting, by the receiving user equipment, a handover request message indicating that the access network used by the session is switched from the second access network to the first access network, from the first Before the step of acquiring, by the network device, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name, performing the following steps:
  • the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network according to the second access point name that is subscribed by the user equipment in the first access network Selecting a second packet data network gateway, and sending a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway;
  • the second packet data network gateway After receiving the message that the second packet data network gateway sends a session failure or a handover failure, performing the obtaining, by the first network device, the first packet data corresponding to the first access point name. The step of identifying the network gateway.
  • the processor 300 controls the first response message received by the receiver 200 to be specifically sent by the first network device in the following situation:
  • Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network by using the second access network, and the second used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network Access point name is different; or, Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and the second access used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network
  • the point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different.
  • the identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
  • the device having the network device selection function on the network side such as the MME, selects the same gateway device as the PDN GW before the handover, so as to ensure that the UE is switched from the old access network to the new access network.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present invention may be a device that manages the user equipment on the network side, such as an HSS.
  • the network device of the embodiment of the present invention includes: a transmitter 400, a receiver 500, and a processor 600, where the processor 600 performs the following Steps:
  • the first request message is used to request to acquire the first packet data used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
  • the access point name is used as the access point name used by the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network, and the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected as The session of the user equipment is switched to the first a packet data network gateway used after accessing the network, where the first access point name is an access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network, the first The access point name is obtained by the third network device from the handover request message or the first response message, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the processor 600 controls the first request message received by the receiver 500 to be a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway.
  • the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
  • the processor 600 further includes the following steps:
  • Determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network specifically: determining, according to at least the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is The second access network becomes the first access network, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or indicates that the session is used.
  • the access network is switched by the second access network to the first access network, and the first request message carries the first indication information; or, by determining the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment, The second access network is changed to the first access network, and the access network used by the user equipment is determined to be changed from the second access network to the first access network.
  • the processor 600 controls that the identifier of the first packet data network gateway carried in the first response message sent by the transmitter 400 is specifically acquired from a second network device, where the second network
  • the device is an authentication server used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network.
  • the processor 600 is configured to control the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message sent by the transmitter 400, where: the first response message carries the first interface The entry name and the identity of the first packet data network gateway.
  • the processor 600 further performs the following steps: Carrying the first access point name in the handover request message, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, according to the first carried in the first request message. And an identifier of the first packet data network gateway, where the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
  • the processor 600 controls the transmitter 400 to perform the following steps before the step of sending the first response message to the third network device:
  • the point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different.
  • the identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
  • the device that performs the subscription management and/or the authentication management and/or the location management on the network device provides the device with the network device selection function on the network side, such as the MME, to provide the UE before the handover.
  • the APN and the identifier of the gateway device such as the PDN GW, so that the device with the network device selection function on the network side, such as the MME, selects the same gateway device as the PDN GW for the UE before the handover, and ensures that the UE switches from the old access network to the new one.
  • the session can continue to be used with the same IP address to avoid data transmission interruption.
  • the storage medium may be a magnetic disk, an optical disk, or a read-only storage memory. RAM) and so on.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The embodiments of the present invention provide a method and apparatus for selecting a network device during switching. The method comprises: receiving a switching request message which is sent by a user equipment and used for indicating to switch an access network used by a session of the user equipment to a first access network from a second access network; acquiring a first access point name used when the user equipment accesses a core network through the second access network and an identification of a first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name; and selecting the first access point name as an access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and selecting a packet data network gateway indicated by the identification of the first packet data network gateway as a packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network. By adopting the present invention, when a UE is switched between access networks, the IP address will not change, thereby effectively avoiding the problem of transmission interruption of IP data streams of the UE.

Description

切换过程中选择网络设备的方法和装置 本申请要求于 2013年 2月 8日提交中国专利局、申请号为 201310050277.0 中国专利申请的优先权, 其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。 技术领域 本发明属于通信领域, 尤其涉及切换过程中选择网络设备的方法和装 置。 背景技术 第三代移动通信网络是根据 3GPP ( 3rd Generation Partnership Project, 第三代移动通信伙伴项目 )标准组织制订标准实现的, 其可筒称为移动通 信网络或 3GPP网络,是目前应用最为普遍的广域移动通信网络。而 WLAN ( Wireless Local Access Network ,无线局域网)作为一种接入方便、速度快、 价格相对低廉的局域通信网络也得到广泛的部署和使用。用户可以使用 UE ( User Equipment,用户设备)接入 3GPP网络或 WLAN网络进行数据业务, 例如访问因特网 Internet, 下载文本 /音频 /视频数据等。  The present application claims priority to Chinese Patent Application No. 201310050277.0, filed on Feb TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to the field of communications, and more particularly to a method and apparatus for selecting a network device during handover. BACKGROUND A third-generation mobile communication network is implemented according to a standard organization of the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which can be called a mobile communication network or a 3GPP network, and is currently the most widely used application. Wide area mobile communication network. The WLAN (Wireless Local Access Network) is widely deployed and used as a local communication network with convenient access, high speed and relatively low price. Users can use the UE (User Equipment) to access the 3GPP network or WLAN network for data services, such as accessing the Internet, downloading text/audio/video data, and so on.
UE还可以通过 WLAN接入到 3GPP核心网,以便于通过 3GPP核心网 访问 Internet, 从而实现 3GPP网络与 WLAN的互通, 有利于 3GPP网络向 WLAN分流数据荷载、进行统一计费和 QoS ( Quality of Service,服务质量 ) 控制等。  The UE can also access the 3GPP core network through the WLAN to facilitate access to the Internet through the 3GPP core network, thereby implementing interworking between the 3GPP network and the WLAN, facilitating the 3GPP network to offload data payloads to the WLAN, and perform unified charging and QoS (Quality of Service). , quality of service) control, etc.
目前, 3GPP标准中规定了 UE通过 TWAN ( Trusted Wireless Access Currently, the 3GPP standard specifies that the UE passes TWAN (Trusted Wireless Access).
Network, 可信的无线接入网络)接入到 3GPP 演进的分组核心网 EPC ( Evolved Packet Core, 演进的分组核心网 )的附着(即注册)流程, 其中, TWAN依据从 3GPP HSS ( Home Subscriber Server, 归属签约服务器) /AAA Server ( Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server, 鉴权、 授权与 计费服务器 )获得的签约数据为 UE选择默认 APN ( Access Point Name , 接入点名称)。 这里, 默认 APN是指在 UE对应的签约数据中标记为 "默认 ( default )" 的 APN; 当 UE在向网络注册或请求建立分组数据连接时, 若 UE不提供 APN, 则网络侧使用默认 APN。 对一个 UE而言, 1 ) UE通过 TWAN接入时使用的默认 APN与 UE通过 3GPP接入时使用的默认 APN可 能不同,从而使得 TWAN接入时 UE所使用的 PDN GW( Packet Data Network Gateway, 分组数据网网关 )可能与 3GPP接入时 UE所使用的 PDN GW不 同; 2 )当 UE通过 TWAN接入使用的默认 APN与 UE通过 3GPP接入使用 的默认 APN相同时, TWAN接入时 UE所使用的 PDN GW也可能与 3GPP 接入时 UE所使用的 PDN GW不同。 Network, trusted wireless access network) access to the 3GPP evolved packet core network EPC (Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core) attachment (ie, registration) process, where TWAN is based on 3GPP HSS (Home Subscriber Server) , the home subscription server) /AAA Server (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server) obtained the subscription data for the UE to select the default APN (Access Point Name). Here, the default APN is marked as "default" in the subscription data corresponding to the UE. (default) APN; when the UE registers with the network or requests to establish a packet data connection, if the UE does not provide the APN, the network side uses the default APN. For one UE, 1) the UE uses when accessing through the TWAN The default APN may be different from the default APN used by the UE when accessing the 3GPP, so that the PDN GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) used by the UE during TWAN access may be the PDN used by the UE when the 3GPP is accessed. GW is different; 2) When the default APN used by the UE through the TWAN access is the same as the default APN used by the UE through the 3GPP access, the PDN GW used by the UE during the TWAN access may also be the PDN used by the UE when the 3GPP accesses GW is different.
因此, 由可信的 WLAN接入网络推广到非 3GPP接入网络, 当 UE通 过非 3GPP接入网络切换到 3GPP EPC后, 如果在非 3GPP接入网络使用的 PDN GW与 3GPP接入网络所使用的 PDN GW不同, 那么, UE所使用的 IP地址在切换前后将不一致, 从而导致该 UE的 IP数据流传输中断。 发明内容  Therefore, it is promoted to the non-3GPP access network by the trusted WLAN access network, and is used by the PDN GW and the 3GPP access network used by the non-3GPP access network after the UE switches to the 3GPP EPC through the non-3GPP access network. The PDN GW is different. Then, the IP address used by the UE will be inconsistent before and after the handover, thereby causing the IP data stream transmission of the UE to be interrupted. Summary of the invention
本发明实施例的目的在于提供一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方法和 装置,旨在解决 UE从非 3GPP接入网络切换到 3GPP接入网络时 IP数据流 传输中断的问题。  An object of the present invention is to provide a method and apparatus for selecting a network device in a handover process, which aims to solve the problem that the IP data stream transmission is interrupted when the UE switches from the non-3GPP access network to the 3GPP access network.
一方面, 本发明实施例提供了一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方法, 所述方法包括:  In one aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for selecting a network device in a handover process, where the method includes:
接收用户设备发送的指示将所述用户设备的会话使用的接入网由第二 接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息;  Receiving, by the user equipment, an indication that the access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched from the second access network to a handover request message of the first access network;
获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入 点名称, 从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心 网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的网络设备, 所述管 理为: 签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种; 选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第 一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所 指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接 入网后使用的分组数据网络网关。 Acquiring the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and acquiring, by the first network device, the user equipment accessing the core network through the second access network The identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is used by the first access point name, where the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, and the management is: subscription management, One or more of authentication management and location management; Selecting the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting the group indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway The data network gateway switches to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
结合第一方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述从第一网络设备获 取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入 点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤, 包括:  With reference to the first aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the acquiring, by the first network device, the first access point that is used when the user equipment accesses a core network by using the second access network The step of identifying the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the name includes:
向所述第一网络设备发送第一请求消息, 所述第一请求消息用于请求 获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一分组数据 网络网关的标识;  Sending a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request to obtain an identifier of a first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network. ;
接收所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息, 所述第一响应消息中至 少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的 标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。  Receiving a first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is connected to the first interface The entry name corresponds.
结合第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一请求消息为位置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一 响应消息为位置更新响应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第一网络设备 为归属签约服务器或鉴权服务器。  With reference to the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message is a location Updating the response or the authentication response or the gateway update response, the first network device being a home subscription server or an authentication server.
结合第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者结合第一方面的第二种 可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述方法还包括:  With reference to the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation of the first aspect, in a third possible implementation, the method further includes:
在所述第一请求消息中携带第一指示信息, 以使所述第一网络设备在 至少根据所述第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接 入网变为所述第一接入网之后, 执行所述发送第一响应消息的步骤, 所述 第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示 将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网;和 /或, 所述第一网络设备通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述 第二接入网改变为所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所 述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网之后执行所述发送第一响应消息的步 骤。 The first request message carries the first indication information, so that the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed by the second access network. After the first access network, the step of sending the first response message is performed, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the indication The access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network; and/or the first network device determines the type of radio access technology of the user equipment by using the The second access network is changed to the first access network, and the access network used by the user equipment is determined to be The step of transmitting the first response message after the second access network becomes the first access network.
结合第一方面, 或者第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方 面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或 者第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述 第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体由所述第一网络设备从第二网络设备获 取, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时 使用的鉴权服务器。  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first aspect In a fourth possible implementation manner, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is specifically acquired by the first network device from a second network device, where the second network device is An authentication server used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
结合第一方面, 或者第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方 面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或 者第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第四种可能的实现 方式, 在第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述选择所述第一接入点名称作为所 述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用 户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关具体 为:  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first aspect The third possible implementation manner, or the fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the fifth possible implementation manner, the selecting the first access point name as the session of the user equipment Switching to the access point name used after the first access network, selecting the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway as the session of the user equipment, switching to the first The packet data network gateway used after accessing the network is specifically:
根据第二指示信息, 选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所 述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数 据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会 话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 所述第二指示信息 指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使 用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述切换请求消息 和 /或所述第一响应消息携带所述第二指示信息。  And selecting, according to the second indication information, the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting the first packet data network gateway The packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier is used as a packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the second indication information indicates that the session is used before the handover. The access network is the second access network or the access network indicating the use of the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network, the handover request message and/or the A response message carries the second indication information.
结合第一方面, 或者第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方 面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或 者第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第四种可能的实现 方式, 或者第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式 中, 所述获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 接入点名称具体为: With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first aspect Three possible implementations, or the fourth possible implementation of the first aspect The fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner, the acquiring, by using the first access network, the user equipment accessing the core network by using the second access network The entry name is specifically:
从所述切换请求消息中获取所述第一接入点名称, 所述切换请求消息 携带所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名 称; 或者,  Obtaining, by the handover request message, the first access point name, where the handover request message carries a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network; or ,
从所述第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心 网时使用的第一接入点名称。  Obtaining, by the first network device, a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
结合第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第一种可能 的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第 三种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 或者第一 方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 结合第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式, 在第七种可能的实现方式中, 所述切换请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名 称, 以使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 进而以使所述第 一网络设备根据所述第一请求消息获取与所述第一接入点名称对应的所述 第一分组数据网络网关的标识。  The first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation of the first aspect, or the third possible implementation of the first aspect The fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in combination with the sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the seventh possible implementation manner The switching request message carries the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, so that the first network device is configured according to the first The request message acquires an identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name.
结合第一方面, 或者第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方 面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或 者第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第四种可能的实现 方式, 或者第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第六种可 能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式, 在第八种可能的 实现方式中, 在所述接收用户设备发送的指示将会话使用的接入网由第二 接入网切换为所述第一接入网的切换请求消息的步骤之后、 从第一网络设 备获取与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤 之前, 所述方法还包括:  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first aspect The three possible implementation manners, or the fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the first aspect A seventh possible implementation manner, in an eighth possible implementation, the access network sent by the receiving user equipment is used to switch the access network used by the session from the second access network to the first access network. The method further includes: before the step of acquiring the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name, after the step of the handover request message, the method further includes:
根据所述用户设备在所述第一接入网中签约的第二接入点名称和在所 述第一接入网中所述第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数据网络网关的标识 选择第二分组数据网络网关, 向所述第二分组数据网络网关发送建立会话 请求消息; Determining, according to the name of the second access point that the user equipment signs in the first access network, Determining, by the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network, a second packet data network gateway, and sending a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway;
接收所述第二分组数据网络网关发送的指示建立会话失败或切换失败 的消息后, 执行所述从所述第一网络设备获取与所述第一接入点名称对应 的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤。  After receiving the message that the second packet data network gateway sends a session failure or a handover failure, performing the obtaining, by the first network device, the first packet data corresponding to the first access point name. The step of identifying the network gateway.
结合第一方面, 或者第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方 面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或 者第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第四种可能的实现 方式, 或者第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第六种可 能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式, 或者第一方面的 第八种可能的实现方式, 在第九种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一响应消息 具体由所述第一网络设备在如下情况下发送:  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation of the first aspect, or the first aspect The three possible implementation manners, or the fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the first aspect The seventh possible implementation manner, or the eighth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the ninth possible implementation manner, the first response message is specifically configured by the first network device Send:
确定所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一 接入点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二 接入点名称不同; 或,  Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network by using the second access network, and the second used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network Access point name is different; or,
确定所述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入 点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入 点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所 述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所 述第二分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。  Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and the second access used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network The point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different. The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
第二方面, 本发明实施例还提供了一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方 法, 所述方法包括:  In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present invention further provides a method for selecting a network device in a handover process, where the method includes:
接收第三网络设备发送的第一请求消息, 所述第一请求消息为所述第 三网络设备在接收到用户设备发送的指示将会话使用的接入网由第二接入 网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息后发送的, 所述第一请求消息用于请 求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一分组数 据网络网关的标识, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数据网络网关的网络设 备; Receiving a first request message sent by the third network device, where the first request message is that the third network device receives the indication sent by the user equipment to switch the access network used by the session from the second access network to the first After the handover request message of the access network is sent, the first request message is used for And obtaining, by the user equipment, an identifier of a first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, where the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway;
向所述第三网络设备发送第一响应消息, 所述第一响应消息中至少携 带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 以使所述第三网络设备选择第一接 入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接 入点名称, 并选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网 络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组 数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第一接入点名称为所述用户设备通过所述第二 接入网接入核心网时使用的接入点名称, 所述第一接入点名称由所述第三 网络设备从所述切换请求消息或所述第一响应消息中获得, 所述第一分组 数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。  Sending a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network device selects the first access point name as the The session of the user equipment is switched to the access point name used after the first access network, and the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected as the user equipment The packet data network gateway used after the session is switched to the first access network, where the first access point name is used by the user equipment when accessing the core network through the second access network. The first access point name is obtained by the third network device from the handover request message or the first response message, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is the first The access point name corresponds.
结合第二方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一请求消息为位 置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息为位置更新响 应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数据网络网 关的网络设备。  With reference to the second aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway. Updating the response, the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
结合第二方面, 或者第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可 能的实现方式中, 所述向所述第三网络设备发送第一响应消息的步骤之前, 还包括: 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一 接入网, 具体为:  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a second possible implementation, before the step of sending the first response message to the third network device, the method further includes: determining The access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, specifically:
至少根据第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接 入网变为所述第一接入网, 其中, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话 使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第 二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述第一请求消息携带所述第一指示信 息; 或,  Determining, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, where the first indication information indicates that the session is used before the handover. The access network is the second access network or the access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to the first access network, and the first request message carries the first An indication message; or,
通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述第二接入网改变为 所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为 所述第一接入网。 Determining, by the second access network, that the type of radio access technology of the user equipment is changed to The first access network determines that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network.
结合第二方面, 或者第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第二方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一响应 消息中携带的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体从第二网络设备获 取, 其中, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核 心网时使用的鉴权服务器。  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a third possible implementation manner, The identifier of the first packet data network gateway is specifically obtained from the second network device, where the second network device is an authentication server used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
结合第二方面, 或者第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第二方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在 第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数 据网络网关的标识包括: 所述第一响应消息中携带所述第一接入点名称和 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识。  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation of the second aspect, or the second possible implementation of the second aspect, or the third possible implementation of the second aspect, in the fourth possible In an implementation manner, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is included in the first response message includes: the first response message carrying the first access point name and the first packet data network gateway Logo.
结合第二方面, 或者第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第二方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第二方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述 方法还包括: 在所述切换请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述 第一请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 根据所述第一请求消息中携带 的所述第一接入点名称, 在所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数 据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点 名称相对应。  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the second aspect, or the second aspect In a fifth possible implementation manner, the method further includes: carrying the first access point name in the handover request message, to carry the first request message The first access point name, according to the first access point name carried in the first request message, carrying at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message, where The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
结合第二方面, 或者第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第二方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第二方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 或者第二方面的第五种可能的实现 方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式, 在所述向所述第三网络设备发送第一响 应消息的步骤之前, 所述方法还包括:  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the second aspect, or the second aspect The fourth possible implementation manner, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner, before the step of sending the first response message to the third network device, The method also includes:
确定所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一 接入点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二 接入点名称不同; 或, Determining the first used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network The access point name is different from the second access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network; or
确定所述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入 点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入 点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所 述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所 述第二分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。  Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and the second access used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network The point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different. The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
第三方面, 本发明实施例还提供了一种切换过程中选择网络设备的装 置, 所述装置包括:  In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present invention further provides a device for selecting a network device in a handover process, where the device includes:
切换请求消息接收单元, 用于接收用户设备发送的指示将所述用户设 备的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息; 第一获取单元, 用于获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心 网时使用的第一接入点名称;  a handover request message receiving unit, configured to receive a handover request message sent by the user equipment, indicating that the access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched from the second access network to the first access network; Obtaining a first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network by using the second access network;
第二获取单元, 用于从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二 接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网 络网关的标识, 所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的网 络设备, 所述管理为: 签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种; 选择单元, 用于选择所述获取单元获取的第一接入点名称作为所述用 户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述 获取单元获取的第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关 作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网 络网关。  a second acquiring unit, configured to acquire, by the first network device, a first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network And the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, where the management is: one or more of subscription management, authentication management, and location management; and a selecting unit, configured to select The first access point name obtained by the acquiring unit is used as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the first packet data network acquired by the acquiring unit is selected. And the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the gateway is switched to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
结合第三方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第二获取单元, 包 括:  With reference to the third aspect, in a first possible implementation, the second acquiring unit includes:
第一请求消息发送子单元, 用于向所述第一网络设备发送第一请求消 息, 所述第一请求消息用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接 入核心网时使用的第一分组数据网络网关的标识; a first request message sending subunit, configured to send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request that the user equipment be connected by using the second access network The identifier of the first packet data network gateway used when entering the core network;
第一响应消息接收子单元, 用于在所述第一请求消息发送子单元发送 第一请求消息之后, 接收所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息, 所述第 一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分组 数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。  a first response message receiving subunit, configured to receive, after the first request message sending subunit sends the first request message, a first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message carries at least The identifier of the first packet data network gateway, where the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
结合第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一请求消息为位置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一 响应消息为位置更新响应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第一网络设备 为归属签约服务器或鉴权服务器。  With reference to the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message is a location Updating the response or the authentication response or the gateway update response, the first network device being a home subscription server or an authentication server.
结合第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第二种可能 的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一请求消息中携带第一 指示信息, 以使所述第一网络设备至少根据所述第一指示信息确定所述用 户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网之后执行所述 发送第一响应消息的步骤, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的 接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入 网切换为所述第一接入网。  With the first possible implementation of the third aspect, or the second possible implementation of the third aspect, in a third possible implementation, the first request message carries the first indication information, And causing the first network device to determine, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, and then performing the sending the first response. a step of the message, the first indication information indicating that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to The first access network.
结合第三方面, 或者第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在 第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述第二获取单元获取的第一分组数据网络网 关的标识具体由所述第一网络设备从第二网络设备获取, 所述第二网络设 备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in the fourth possible In an implementation manner, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway acquired by the second acquiring unit is specifically acquired by the first network device from the second network device, where the second network device is the user equipment The authentication server used when the access network accesses the core network.
结合第三方面, 或者第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述 选择单元具体用于,  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third aspect In a fifth possible implementation manner, the selecting unit is specifically configured to:
根据第二指示信息, 选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所 述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数 据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会 话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第二指 示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述 会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述切换请 求消息和 /或所述第一响应消息携带所述第二指示信息。 Determining, according to the second indication information, the first access point name as a location of the user equipment Determining, by the session, the access point name used after the first access network is switched, selecting the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway as the session of the user equipment, switching to the a packet data network gateway used after the first access network, where the second indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or indicates that the session is used for access The network is switched by the second access network to the first access network, and the handover request message and/or the first response message carries the second indication information.
结合第三方面, 或者第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第五种可能的实现 方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一获取单元具体用于从所述切 换请求消息中获取所述第一接入点名称, 所述切换请求消息携带所述用户 设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名称; 或者, 具体用于从所述第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网 接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名称。  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third aspect The fourth possible implementation manner, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in the sixth possible implementation manner, the first acquiring unit is specifically configured to obtain the foregoing information from the handover request message An access point name, where the handover request message carries a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network; or, specifically, from the first network device Obtaining a first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network.
结合第三方面, 或者第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第五种可能的实现 方式, 或者第三方面的第六种可能的实现方式, 在第七种可能的实现方式 中, 所述切换请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述第一请求消 息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 进而以使所述第一网络设备根据所述第一 请求消息获取与所述第一接入点名称对应的所述第一分组数据网络网关的 标识。  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third aspect The four possible implementation manners, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the sixth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, where the handover request message is carried in the seventh possible implementation manner The first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, so that the first network device acquires the first request message according to the first request message. The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the access point name.
结合第三方面, 或者第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方 面的第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第五种可能的实现 方式, 或者第三方面的第六种可能的实现方式, 或者第三方面的第七种可 能的实现方式中, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 在所述接收单元接收之前, 所述装置还包括: With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the third aspect Four possible implementations, or a fifth possible implementation of the third aspect, or a sixth possible implementation of the third aspect, or a seventh of the third aspect In an implementation manner, in an eighth possible implementation, before the receiving unit receives, the device further includes:
建立会话请求消息发送单元, 用于在所述切换请求消息接收单元接收 到所述切换请求消息之后, 在所述第二获取单元获取所述第一分组数据网 络网关的标识之前, 根据所述用户设备在所述第一接入网中签约的第二接 入点名称和在所述第一接入网中所述第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数据 网络网关的标识选择第二分组数据网络网关, 向所述第二分组数据网络网 关发送建立会话请求消息;  a session request message sending unit, configured to: after the switching request message receiving unit receives the switching request message, before the second obtaining unit acquires the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, according to the user Selecting, by the device, the second access point name signed in the first access network and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network to select the second group a data network gateway, sending a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway;
执行单元, 用于接收所述第二分组数据网络网关发送的指示建立会话 失败或切换失败的消息后, 通知所述第二获取单元从第一网络设备获取所 述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名 称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识。  An execution unit, configured to receive, by the second packet data network gateway, a message indicating that a session failure or a handover failure is established, notify the second obtaining unit to acquire, by the first network device, the user equipment by using the second connection The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used when accessing the core network.
第四方面, 本发明实施例还提供了一种切换过程中选择网络设备的装 置, 所述装置包括:  In a fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present invention further provides a device for selecting a network device in a handover process, where the device includes:
第一请求消息接收单元, 用于接收第三网络设备发送的第一请求消息, 所述第一请求消息为所述第三网络设备在接收到用户设备发送的指示将会 话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息后发送 的, 所述第一请求消息用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接 入核心网时使用的第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第三网络设备为选 择分组数据网络网关的网络设备;  a first request message receiving unit, configured to receive a first request message sent by the third network device, where the first request message is an access network that is sent by the third network device to receive the indication sent by the user equipment After the second access network is switched to the handover request message of the first access network, the first request message is used to request to acquire the first used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network. An identifier of a packet data network gateway, where the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway;
第一响应消息发送单元, 用于向所述第三网络设备发送第一响应消息, 所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 以使所 述第三网络设备选择第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到 所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 并选择所述第一分组数据网络网关 的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所 述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第一接入点名称为 所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的接入点名称, 所述 第一接入点名称由所述第三网络设备从所述切换请求消息或所述第一响应 消息中获得, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相 对应。 a first response message sending unit, configured to send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network device Selecting a first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting packet data indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway The network gateway is used as the packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to switch to the first access network, where the first access point name is An access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network, where the first access point name is used by the third network device from the handover request message or the first Obtained in the response message, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
结合第四方面, 在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一请求消息为位 置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息为位置更新响 应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数据网络网 关的网络设备。  With reference to the fourth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner, the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway. Updating the response, the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
结合第四方面, 或者第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 在第二种 可能的实现方式中, 所述装置还包括:  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a second possible implementation, the apparatus further includes:
确定单元, 用于在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息 之前, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接 入网。  a determining unit, configured to determine, before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, that an access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network .
结合第四方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述确定单元具体用于:  With reference to the second possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the determining unit is specifically configured to:
在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息之前, 至少根据 第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述 第一接入网, 其中, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网 为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换 为所述第一接入网, 所述第一请求消息携带所述第一指示信息; 或,  Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determining, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access a network, where the first indication information indicates that an access network used by the session before handover is the second access network or an access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to The first access message, the first request message carries the first indication information; or
在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息之前, 通过确定 所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述第二接入网改变为所述第一接入 网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入 网。  Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determining that the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, The access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network.
结合第四方面, 或者第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 或者第四 方面第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第四方面第三种可能的实现方式, 在第 四种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一响应消息中携带的所述第一分组数据网 络网关的标识具体从第二网络设备获取, 其中, 所述第二网络设备为所述 用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, In the four possible implementation manners, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is carried in the first response message is specifically acquired by the second network device, where the second network device is the user equipment An authentication server used when the second access network accesses the core network.
结合第四方面, 或者第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 或者第四 方面第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第四方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述 第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识包括: 所述第 一响应消息中携带所述第一接入点名称和所述第一分组数据网络网关的标 识。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the fourth aspect In a fifth possible implementation manner, the identifier that the at least the first packet data network gateway carries in the first response message includes: the first response message carrying the first An access point name and an identification of the first packet data network gateway.
结合第四方面, 或者第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 或者第四 方面第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第四方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 或者第四方面的第五种可能的实现 方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述切换请求消息中携带所述第一接 入点名称, 以使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 根据所述 第一请求消息中携带的所述第一接入点名称, 在所述第一响应消息中至少 携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标 识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the fourth aspect The fourth possible implementation manner, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the sixth possible implementation manner, the switching request message carries the first access point name, so that the The first request message carries the first access point name, and carries at least the first packet data in the first response message according to the first access point name carried in the first request message. An identifier of the network gateway, where the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
结合第四方面, 或者第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 或者第四 方面第二种可能的实现方式, 或者第四方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 或 者第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 或者第四方面的第五种可能的实现 方式, 或者第四方面的第六种可能的实现方式, 在第七种可能的实现方式 中, 所述装置还包括确定单元, 具体用于:  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the third possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the fourth aspect The fourth possible implementation manner, or the fifth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the sixth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner, the device further includes a determining unit , specifically for:
在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息之前, 确定所述 用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入点名称与 所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入点名称不 同; 或者, 在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息之前, 确定所述 用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入点名称与所述 用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网 接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所述第二分组数 据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。 Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, and the user The second access point name used by the device when accessing the core network by using the first access network is different; or Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determining, by using the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, and the user equipment The second access point name used by the first access network to access the core network is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway and the user equipment access the core network through the first access network. The identifier of the second packet data network gateway used at the time is different, and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
本发明实施例中, UE在接入网之间切换时, 并不是通过分配新的 APN 和 PDN GW的方式建立 UE到新的接入网的连接, 而是通过一个新的获取流 程获取接入原接入网时使用的如 PDN GW等网络设备, 从而使得 UE切换到 另一接入网后, IP地址并不会发生改变, 避免了 UE的 IP数据流传输中断的 问题。 附图说明  In the embodiment of the present invention, when the UE switches between the access networks, the UE does not establish a connection between the UE and the new access network by assigning a new APN and a PDN GW, but obtains access through a new acquisition process. The network device, such as the PDN GW, used in the original access network, so that the IP address does not change after the UE switches to another access network, and the problem of interruption of the IP data stream transmission of the UE is avoided. DRAWINGS
图 1 是本发明实施例的一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的流程示 意图;  1 is a schematic flow chart of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 2是本发明实施例的获取分组数据网络网关的标识的其中一种具体 方法的流程示意图;  2 is a schematic flowchart of a specific method for obtaining an identifier of a packet data network gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 3是本发明实施例的另一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的流程 示意图;  3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 4是本发明实施例的又一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的流程 示意图;  4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 5是本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的其中一种具 体流程示意图;  FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a specific process of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 6是本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的其中另一种 具体流程示意图;  6 is a schematic diagram of another specific process of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 7是本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的其中又一种 具体流程示意图; FIG. 7 is still another example of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention; Specific process diagram;
图 8是本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的其中再一种 具体流程示意图;  FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of still another specific process of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 9是本发明实施例的一种切换过程中选择网络设备的装置的结构组 成示意图;  FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 10是图 9中的所述第二获取单元的其中一种具体结构示意图; 图 11是本发明实施例的另一种切换过程中选择网络设备的装置的结构 组成示意图;  10 is a schematic diagram of a specific structure of the second acquiring unit in FIG. 9; FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for selecting a network device in another switching process according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 12是本发明实施例的又一种切换过程中选择网络设备的装置的结构 组成示意图;  FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 13是本发明实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构组成示意图; 图 14是本发明实施例提供的另一种网络设备的结构组成示意图。 具体实肺式 为了使本发明的目的、 技术方案及优点更加清楚明白, 以下结合附图 及实施例, 对本发明进行进一步详细说明。 应当理解, 此处所描述的具体 实施例仅仅用以解释本发明, 并不用于限定本发明。  FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present invention. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION In order to make the objects, technical solutions and advantages of the present invention more comprehensible, the present invention will be further described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It is understood that the specific embodiments described herein are merely illustrative of the invention and are not intended to limit the invention.
请参见图 1 ,是本发明实施例的一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的 流程示意图,本发明实施例的所述方法可应用于用户设备 UE在不同接入网 之间进行接入切换时, 对包括分组数据网络网关 PDN GW等网络设备的选 择, 具体可以通过例如 MME ( Mobility Management Entity, 移动管理实体 ) 等具有网络设备选择功能的设备执行, 具体的, 本发明实施例的所述方法 包括:  FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The method in the embodiment of the present invention may be applied to user equipment UE performing access switching between different access networks. The selection of the network device, including the packet data network gateway PDN GW, may be performed by a device having a network device selection function, such as an MME (Mobility Management Entity), which is specifically described in the embodiment of the present invention. Methods include:
S101 : 接收用户设备发送的指示将所述用户设备的会话使用的接入网 由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息;  S101: Receive a handover request message that is sent by the user equipment to switch the access network used by the session of the user equipment from the second access network to the first access network.
用户设备 UE可以是在接收到用户的网络切换指令时,或者在检测到覆 盖信号好于所述第一接入网的第二接入网时, 生成并发送所述指示将所述The user equipment UE may be when receiving the network switching instruction of the user, or when detecting the overlay Generating and transmitting the indication when the cover signal is better than the second access network of the first access network
UE的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息, 该切换请求消息具体为用于请求进行网络切换的消息,例如,如果 UE需要 从非 3GPP接入网切换至 3GPP接入网时, 切换请求消息可以为 UE向相应 的 MME发送的附着请求消息 ( attach request ) 。 The access network used by the session of the UE is switched by the second access network to the handover request message of the first access network, where the handover request message is specifically a message for requesting network handover, for example, if the UE needs to connect from the non-3GPP When the network is switched to the 3GPP access network, the handover request message may be an attach request message (attach request) sent by the UE to the corresponding MME.
S 102: 获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第 一接入点名称, 从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接 入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的 标识。  S102: Obtain a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, and obtain, by the first network device, the user equipment to access by using the second access network. The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the core network.
所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的网络设备, 例 如归属签约服务器 HSS或者鉴权服务器等, 所述管理为: 签约管理、 鉴权 管理和位置管理中的一种或多种。在 UE通过第二接入网接入核心网时,第 一网络设备获取并存储管理该 UE使用的 APN及对应的 PDN GW。  The first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment on the network side, such as a home subscription server HSS or an authentication server, and the management is: one of subscription management, authentication management, and location management. A variety. When the UE accesses the core network through the second access network, the first network device acquires and stores the APN used by the UE and the corresponding PDN GW.
可选的, 所述第一接入点名称即第一 APN可以直接从所述切换请求消 息中获取,即 UE在所述切换请求消息中可以携带所述用户设备通过所述第 二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 APN; 也就是说, 第一接入点名称可以 是所述用户设备直接上报的。 或者: 也可以从所述第一网络设备中获取所 述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 APN , 即可以是 根据用户设备 UE的标识等信息到如 HSS等第一网络设备中请求查找后获 取的。  Optionally, the first access point name, that is, the first APN, may be directly obtained from the handover request message, that is, the UE may carry the user equipment through the second access network in the handover request message. The first APN used when accessing the core network; that is, the first access point name may be directly reported by the user equipment. Or: obtaining, by the first network device, the first APN that is used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, that is, according to information such as the identifier of the user equipment, such as the HSS. Waiting for the first network device to obtain the request after the lookup.
而所述第一分组数据网络网关即第一 PDN GW的标识, 则可以在确定 了所述 UE的第一 APN后,根据所述第一 APN到第一网络设备中获取到对 应的第一 PDN GW的标识。 当然, 在其他实施例中, 也可以根据用户设备 UE的标识从如 HSS等第一网络设备中获取。 所述第一 PDN GW的标识可 以为第一 PDN GW地址, 或者 PDN GW FQDN ( Fully Qualified Domain Name, 全称域名 )等。 S103 : 选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到 所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的 标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述 第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关。 The first packet data network gateway, that is, the identifier of the first PDN GW, may obtain the corresponding first PDN according to the first APN to the first network device after determining the first APN of the UE. GW's logo. Of course, in other embodiments, the first network device, such as an HSS, may also be obtained according to the identifier of the user equipment UE. The identifier of the first PDN GW may be a first PDN GW address, or a PDN GW FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name). S103: The first access point name is selected as the access point name used by the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected. The packet data network gateway switches to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
UE继续通过在第二接入网中使用的 APN和 PDN GW接入到第一接入 网, 从而实现接入到核心网中进行各类数据访问、 交互等操作。  The UE continues to access the first access network through the APN and the PDN GW used in the second access network, thereby implementing access to the core network for various types of data access, interaction, and the like.
具体的, 所述 S103具体可以包括: 根据第二指示信息, 选择所述第一 接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的 接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网 络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组 数据网络网关, 所述第二指示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所 述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所 述第一接入网, 所述切换请求消息和 /或所述第一响应消息携带所述第二指 示信息。  Specifically, the S103 may include: selecting, according to the second indication information, the first access point name as an access point name used by the session of the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network. And selecting, by the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, the second indication The information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to the first access network, The handover request message and/or the first response message carries the second indication information.
在获取到 UE接入第一接入网接入到核心网时使用的第一 APN和第一 PDN GW的标识后, 根据切换请求消息中的第二指示信息或者由第一网络 设备根据第一请求消息返回的第一响应消息中携带的第二指示信息, 发起 会话建立流程。  After obtaining the identifiers of the first APN and the first PDN GW that are used when the UE accesses the first access network to access the core network, according to the second indication information in the handover request message or the first network device according to the first The second indication information carried in the first response message returned by the request message initiates a session establishment process.
本发明实施例中, UE在接入网之间切换时, 通过本发明实施例的流程 实现在切换过程中选择切换前通过原接入网接入核心网时使用的网络设 备, 具体的, 在切换过程中选择切换前通过原接入网接入核心网时使用的 分组数据网络网关, 从而使得 UE切换到另一接入网后, IP地址并不会发 生改变, 避免了 UE的 IP数据流传输中断的问题。  In the embodiment of the present invention, when the UE switches between the access networks, the network device used when accessing the core network through the original access network before the handover is selected in the handover process is implemented by the process of the embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, During the handover process, the packet data network gateway used when accessing the core network through the original access network is selected, so that the IP address does not change after the UE switches to another access network, and the IP data flow of the UE is avoided. The problem of transmission interruption.
再请参见图 2 ,是本发明实施例的获取分组数据网络网关的标识的其中 一种具体方法的流程示意图, 本发明实施例的分组数据网络网关的标识的 获取方法包括: S1001 : 向所述第一网络设备发送第一请求消息, 所述第一请求消息用 于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一分 组数据网络网关的标识; 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for obtaining an identifier of a packet data network gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention. The method for obtaining an identifier of a packet data network gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention includes: S1001: Send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request to acquire a first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network. Identification
S1002: 接收所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息, 所述第一响应消 息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分组数据网络 网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。  S1002: Receive a first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway and the first An access point name corresponds.
所述第一请求消息中可以包括该 UE的标识和 /或用户信息和 /或 UE接 入第二接入网所使用的第一 APN ( UE直接上报的 )等, 以便于 HSS等第 一网络设备能够在本地存储的 PDN GW标识中, 查找该 UE接入第二接入 网时所使用的 PDN GW的标识,并返回查找到的 PDN GW标识即第一 PDN GW的标识。 UE可以在所述切换请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以 使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 进而以使 HSS等所述第 一网络设备根据所述第一请求消息获取与所述第一接入点名称对应的所述 第一分组数据网络网关的标识。  The first request message may include the identifier and/or user information of the UE and/or the first APN (directly reported by the UE) used by the UE to access the second access network, etc., to facilitate the first network such as the HSS. The device can search for the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE when accessing the second access network, and return the identifier of the first PDN GW that is the discovered PDN GW identifier. The UE may carry the first access point name in the handover request message, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, so that the first network device, such as the HSS, is configured according to the The first request message acquires an identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name.
当然, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体也可以由所述第一网络 设备从第二网络设备获取, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第 二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 即: HSS 等第一网络设备也可 以在接收到所述第一请求消息时, 根据对应的 UE的标识向如 AAA Server 等用于进行鉴权、授权以及计费的第二网络设备去获取该 UE接入第二接入 网所使用的 PDN GW标识, 以便于第一网络设备能够根据第一请求消息返 回相应的第一 PDN GW的标识。  The identifier of the first packet data network gateway may be specifically acquired by the first network device from the second network device, where the second network device is accessed by the user equipment by using the second access network. The authentication server used by the core network. That is, the first network device, such as the HSS, may also obtain the second network device, such as an AAA Server for authentication, authorization, and accounting, according to the identifier of the corresponding UE when receiving the first request message. The UE accesses the PDN GW identifier used by the second access network, so that the first network device can return the identifier of the corresponding first PDN GW according to the first request message.
具体的, 所述第一请求消息可以为位置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更 新请求, 所述第一响应消息对应于所述第一请求消息可以为位置更新响应 或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第一网络设备可以为归属签约服务器或 鉴权服务器。  Specifically, the first request message may be a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message may be a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway update response corresponding to the first request message. The first network device may be a home subscription server or an authentication server.
进一步的, 第一网络设备在根据第一请求消息返回第一响应消息之前, 首先可以根据第一请求消息确定 UE使用的接入网是否发生切换, 若发生, 则获取第一 PDN GW的标识,并返回至少携带所述第一 PDN GW的标识的 第一响应消息, 具体可以通过以下步骤实现: Further, before the first network device returns the first response message according to the first request message, First, the first request message may be used to determine whether the access network used by the UE is switched. If yes, the identifier of the first PDN GW is obtained, and the first response message that carries the identifier of the first PDN GW is returned. This is achieved by the following steps:
在所述第一请求消息中携带第一指示信息, 以使所述第一网络设备在 至少根据所述第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接 入网变为所述第一接入网之后, 执行所述发送第一响应消息的步骤, 所述 第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示 将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网;和 /或, 所述第一网络设备通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述 第二接入网改变为所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所 述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网之后执行所述发送第一响应消息的步 骤。  The first request message carries the first indication information, so that the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed by the second access network. After the first access network, the step of sending the first response message is performed, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the indication The access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network; and/or the first network device determines the type of radio access technology of the user equipment by using the The second access network is changed to the first access network, and determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, and the sending the first response is performed. The steps of the message.
具体的, 第一请求消息可以是位置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请 求, 第一请求消息中可以携带第一指示信息, 指示切换前所述会话使用的 接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入 网切换为所述第一接入网; 所述第一网络设备在接收到第一请求消息后, 依据第一请求消息中携带的第一指示信息, 和 /或依据第一网络设备存储的 所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型, 确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类 型由所述第二接入网改变为所述第一接入网。  Specifically, the first request message may be a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first request message may carry the first indication information, indicating that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second connection Entering the network or indicating that the access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network; after receiving the first request message, the first network device is configured according to the first request The first indication information carried in the message, and/or determining the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment by the second access network according to the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment stored by the first network device For the first access network.
进一步可选地, 所述第一响应消息具体由所述第一设备在如下情况下 发送:  Further optionally, the first response message is specifically sent by the first device in the following situation:
确定所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一 接入点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二 接入点名称不同; 或,  Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network by using the second access network, and the second used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network Access point name is different; or,
确定所述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入 点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入 点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所 述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所 述第二分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。 Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and the second access used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network The point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different. The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
可以理解的是, 本发明实施例中的获取分组数据网络网关的标识的方 法具体可以对应于上述图 1所述的 S102中的从第一网络设备获取所述用户 设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应 的第一分组数据网络网关的标识步骤。  It is to be understood that the method for obtaining the identifier of the packet data network gateway in the embodiment of the present invention may be corresponding to the acquiring, by the second network access, the user equipment from the first network device in S102 in FIG. The step of identifying the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the network to access the core network.
通过上述实施例的描述可知, 本发明具有以下优点:  As can be seen from the description of the above embodiments, the present invention has the following advantages:
通过本发明实施例披露的切换流程,可以确保 UE在切换到新的接入网 后继续使用其切换前通过原接入网接入核心网时所使用的 PDN GW, 从而 IP地址不会发生改变, 避免了 UE的 IP数据流传输中断的问题。  The handover procedure disclosed in the embodiment of the present invention can ensure that the UE continues to use the PDN GW used by the original access network to access the core network before switching, so that the IP address does not change after switching to the new access network. The problem of interruption of the IP data stream transmission of the UE is avoided.
再请参见图 3 ,是本发明实施例的另一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方 法的流程示意图, 本实施例的所述方法具体包括:  Referring to FIG. 3, it is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The method in this embodiment specifically includes:
S201 : 接收用户设备发送的指示将所述用户设备的会话使用的接入网 由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息。  S201: Receive a handover request message that is sent by the user equipment to switch the access network used by the session of the user equipment from the second access network to the first access network.
S202: 根据所述用户设备在所述第一接入网中签约的第二接入点名称 和在所述第一接入网中所述第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数据网络网关 的标识选择第二分组数据网络网关, 向所述第二分组数据网络网关发送建 立会话请求消息。  S202: According to the second access point name that is subscribed by the user equipment in the first access network, and the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network. The identifier selects the second packet data network gateway, and sends a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway.
即在接收到切换请求消息时, 先尝试直接由签约数据得到所述用户设 备的第二接入点名称, 并直接得到第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数据网 络网关。 此时, 如果得到的第二接入点名称和用户设备通过第二接入网接 入到核心网时的第一接入点名称相同, 则可能得到的对应第二 PDN GW的 标识也与第一 APN对应的第一 PDN GW相同, 此时也可以发起建立会话 请求以建立会话并保证 IP传输不中断。  That is, when receiving the handover request message, first try to obtain the second access point name of the user equipment directly from the subscription data, and directly obtain the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name. At this time, if the obtained second access point name is the same as the first access point name when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network, the identifier of the corresponding second PDN GW that may be obtained is also The first PDN GW corresponding to an APN is the same, and a session establishment request may also be initiated to establish a session and ensure that the IP transmission is not interrupted.
如果因为第一 APN与第二 APN不相同导致第一 PDN GW与第二 PDN GW不相同时; 或者虽然第一 APN和第二 ANP相同, 但是第一 PDN GW 与第二 PDN GW仍然不相同时, 在发起会话建立请求后, 相应的第二 PDN GW 无法识别切换请求消息中的切换指示导致会话建立失败, 那么会执行 下述的 S203。 If the first PDN and the second PDN are different because the first APN is different from the second APN When the GWs are not the same; or although the first APN and the second ANP are the same, but the first PDN GW and the second PDN GW are still different, after the session establishment request is initiated, the corresponding second PDN GW cannot identify the handover request message. The switching instruction causes the session establishment to fail, and then S203 described below is executed.
S203 : 接收所述第二分组数据网络网关发送的指示建立会话失败或切 换失败的消息。 在接收到指示建立会话失败或切换失败的消息时, 需要执 行下述 S204以发起获取 UE接入第二接入网时所使用的第一 APN和第一 PDN GW。  S203: Receive a message sent by the second packet data network gateway indicating that the establishment session fails or the handover fails. When receiving the message indicating that the establishment of the session fails or the handover fails, the following S204 needs to be performed to initiate the acquisition of the first APN and the first PDN GW used by the UE to access the second access network.
S204: 获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第 一接入点名称, 从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接 入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的 标识, 所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的网络设备, 所述管理为: 签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种。  S204: Acquire a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, and obtain, by the first network device, the user equipment accessing the core by using the second access network. The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the network, the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, and the management is: signing One or more of management, authentication management, and location management.
S205: 选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到 所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的 标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述 第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关。  S205: The first access point name is selected as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected. The packet data network gateway switches to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
需要说明的是, 与上述图 1 对应的实施例相比, 本发明实施例是在所 述接收用户设备发送的指示将会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为所述 第一接入网的切换请求消息的步骤之后、 从第一网络设备获取与所述第一 接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤之前, 新增加了上 述的 S202和 S203的步骤, 所述 S201和上述的 S101执行过程相同, 而所 述的 S204和 S205则对应于上述的 S102和 S103 , 具体实现过程在此不赘 述。  It should be noted that, in comparison with the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1, the embodiment of the present invention is that the access network sent by the receiving user equipment indicates that the access network used by the session is switched from the second access network to the first interface. After the step of the network switching request message, the step of acquiring the identifiers of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name from the first network device is newly added, and the steps of S202 and S203 are newly added. The S201 and the S101 are performed in the same manner, and the S204 and S205 are corresponding to the foregoing S102 and S103, and the specific implementation process is not described herein.
通过上述实施例的描述可知, 本发明具有以下优点:  As can be seen from the description of the above embodiments, the present invention has the following advantages:
通过本发明实施例披露的切换流程,可以确保 UE在切换到新的接入网 后继续使用其切换前通过原接入网接入核心网时所使用的 PDN GW, 从而 IP地址不会发生改变, 避免了 UE的 IP数据流传输中断的问题。 The handover procedure disclosed in the embodiment of the present invention can ensure that the UE is handed over to the new access network. After that, the PDN GW used when accessing the core network through the original access network before the handover is continued, so that the IP address does not change, and the problem that the IP data stream transmission of the UE is interrupted is avoided.
再请参见图 4,是本发明实施例的又一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方 法的流程示意图,本发明实施例的所述方法应用于用户设备 UE在不同接入 网之间进行接入切换时, 对包括分组数据网络网关 PDN GW等网络设备的 选择, 具体可以通过例如 HSS等具有对所述用户设备进行包括签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种管理的设备执行, 本发明实施例的所 述方法包括:  Referring to FIG. 4, it is a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The method in the embodiment of the present invention is applied to user equipment UE accessing between different access networks. When switching, the selection of the network device including the packet data network gateway PDN GW may specifically be performed by, for example, an HSS, such as a device that performs one or more management including subscription management, authentication management, and location management on the user equipment. The method of the embodiment of the present invention includes:
S301 : 接收第三网络设备发送的第一请求消息, 所述第一请求消息为 所述第三网络设备在接收到用户设备发送的指示将会话使用的接入网由第 二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息后发送的, 所述第一请求消息 用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数据网络网关的 网络设备。  S301: The first request message sent by the third network device is received, where the first request message is that the third network device receives the indication sent by the user equipment to switch the access network used by the session from the second access network to And sending, by the first access network, a handover request message, where the first request message is used to request to obtain an identifier of the first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network. The third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
具体的, 所述第三网络设备可以为 MME等网络设备。用户设备 UE可 以是在接收到用户的网络切换指令时, 或者在检测到覆盖信号好于所述第 一接入网的第二接入网时, 生成并发送相应的指示将所述用户设备的会话 使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息, 该切换请 求消息具体用于请求进行网络切换的消息, 例如, 如果 UE需要从非 3GPP 接入网切换至 3GPP接入网时, UE向相应的 MME发送附着请求消息( attach request ) 。  Specifically, the third network device may be a network device such as an MME. The user equipment UE may generate and send a corresponding indication to the user equipment when receiving the network switching instruction of the user, or when detecting that the coverage signal is better than the second access network of the first access network. The access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the handover request message of the first access network, where the handover request message is specifically used to request a message for performing network handover, for example, if the UE needs to switch from the non-3GPP access network. When the network accesses the 3GPP, the UE sends an attach request message (attach request) to the corresponding MME.
所述第一请求消息为位置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述 第一响应消息对应于所述第一请求消息可以为位置更新响应或鉴权响应或 网关更新响应, 所述第一网络设备为归属签约服务器或鉴权服务器。  The first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, and the first response message may be a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway update response, where the first response message is A network device is a home subscription server or an authentication server.
S302: 向所述第三网络设备发送第一响应消息, 所述第一响应消息中 至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 以使所述第三网络设备选择 第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使 用的接入点名称, 并选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组 数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用 的分组数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第一接入点名称为所述用户设备通过所 述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的接入点名称, 所述第一接入点名称由所 述第三网络设备从所述切换请求消息或所述第一响应消息中获得, 所述第 一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。 S302: Send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network device selects The first access point name is used as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and the packet data network indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected. The gateway is used as the packet data network gateway used by the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network, where the first access point name is the user equipment through the second access network. An access point name used when accessing the core network, where the first access point name is obtained by the third network device from the handover request message or the first response message, the first packet data network The identifier of the gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
所述第一响应消息中的第一分组数据网络网关的标识可以是根据 UE 的标识、 用户信息、 或者 UE接入第二接入网所使用的第一 APN ( UE直接 上报的)等信息, 在本地存储的 PDN GW标识中, 查找该 UE接入第二接 入网时所使用的 PDN GW的标识, 并携带在所述第一响应消息中返回给第 三网络设备。  The identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message may be information according to the identifier of the UE, the user information, or the first APN (directly reported by the UE) used by the UE to access the second access network. In the PDN GW identifier that is stored in the local area, the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE to access the second access network is searched and carried in the first response message and returned to the third network device.
当然, 所述第一响应消息中携带的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识 具体也可以从第二网络设备获取, 其中, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设 备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 即: HSS 等第一 网络设备也可以在接收到所述第一请求消息时,根据对应的 UE的标识到如 AAA Server等用于进行鉴权、 授权以及计费的第二网络设备中获取该 UE 接入第一接入网所使用的 PDN GW标识, 以便于第一网络设备能够根据第 一请求消息返回相应的 PDN GW的标识。  The identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is carried in the first response message may be specifically obtained from the second network device, where the second network device is the second device The authentication server used when accessing the core network. That is, the first network device, such as the HSS, may also obtain the first request message, according to the identifier of the corresponding UE, to the second network device, such as the AAA Server, for performing authentication, authorization, and accounting. The UE accesses the PDN GW identifier used by the first access network, so that the first network device can return the identifier of the corresponding PDN GW according to the first request message.
第一网络设备在根据第一请求消息返回第一响应消息之前, 还包括: 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网, 具体为:  Before the first network device returns the first response message according to the first request message, the method further includes: determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, specifically :
至少根据第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接 入网变为所述第一接入网, 其中, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话 使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第 二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述第一请求消息携带所述第一指示信 息; 或, Determining, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, where the first indication information indicates that the session is used before the handover. The access network is the second access network or the access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to the first access network, and the first request message carries the first An indication letter Interest; or,
通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述第二接入网改变为 所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为 所述第一接入网。  Determining that the type of radio access technology of the user equipment is changed by the second access network to the first access network, determining that an access network used by the user equipment is changed by the second access network The first access network.
在确定用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网 后, 即获取相应的第一分组数据网络网关, 或者进一步的再获取第一 APN 等信息以便于在第一响应消息携带第一 PND GW和第一 APN返回给第三 网络设备。  After determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, the corresponding first packet data network gateway is obtained, or information such as the first APN is further acquired. And transmitting, in the first response message, the first PND GW and the first APN to the third network device.
进一步的, 获取第一 PND GW和第一 APN的具体获取方式可以为: 在所述切换请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述第一请求消息 中携带所述第一接入点名称, 根据所述第一请求消息中携带的所述第一接 入点名称, 在所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的 标识, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。  Further, the method for obtaining the first PND GW and the first APN may be: carrying the first access point name in the handover request message, so that the first request message carries the first The access point name, according to the first access point name carried in the first request message, carrying at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message, the first packet The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
进一步可选地, 所述第一响应消息具体由所述第一设备在如下情况下 发送:  Further optionally, the first response message is specifically sent by the first device in the following situation:
确定所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一 接入点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二 接入点名称不同; 或,  Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network by using the second access network, and the second used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network Access point name is different; or,
确定所述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入 点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入 点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所 述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所 述第二分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。  Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and the second access used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network The point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different. The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
通过上述实施例的描述可知, 本发明具有以下优点:  As can be seen from the description of the above embodiments, the present invention has the following advantages:
通过本发明实施例披露的切换流程,可以确保 UE在切换到新的接入网 后继续使用其切换前通过原接入网接入核心网时所使用的 PDN GW, 从而 IP地址不会发生改变, 避免了 UE的 IP数据流传输中断的问题。 The handover procedure disclosed in the embodiment of the present invention can ensure that the UE continues to use the PDN GW used when accessing the core network through the original access network before switching, after the handover to the new access network, thereby The IP address does not change, and the problem of interruption of the IP data stream transmission of the UE is avoided.
下面以 4个具体实例介绍本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的 方法。  The method for selecting a network device in the handover process of the embodiment of the present invention is described in the following four specific examples.
请参见图 5 ,是本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的其中 一种具体流程示意图。 本发明实施例的所述方法应用于 UE从非 3GPP的 TWAN切换到 3GPP接入网, 其中的 MME为第三网络设备, 而 HSS则为 第一网络设备, TWAN为第二接入网, 3GPP接入网的 E-UTRAN为第一接 入网。 所述方法具体包括:  FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a specific process of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The method of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to handover of a UE from a non-3GPP TWAN to a 3GPP access network, where the MME is a third network device, and the HSS is a first network device, and the TWAN is a second access network, 3GPP. The E-UTRAN of the access network is the first access network. The method specifically includes:
SI : UE 连接到可信的无线接入网络 TWAN。 UE 可以通过服务于该 UE的 PDN GW与 TWAN之间的 S2a接口建立 PMIPv6( Proxy Mobile IPv6, 代理移动 IPv6协议 )或 GTP ( GPRS Tunnel Protocol, 通用分组无线业务隧 道协议 )隧道, 实现 UE与 TWAN的连接,并通过相应的 IP地址建立会话, 从而到核心网中或通过核心网进行数据访问。  SI: The UE is connected to the trusted wireless access network TWAN. The UE may establish a PMIPv6 (Proxy Mobile IPv6) or a GTP (GPRS Tunnel Protocol) tunnel through the S2a interface between the PDN GW and the TWAN serving the UE to implement the UE and the TWAN. Connect and establish a session through the corresponding IP address to access data in the core network or through the core network.
S2: UE检测到 E-UTRAN ( Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network, 演进的通用地面无线接入网络) , 决定将当前会话由 TWAN切 换到 E-UTRAN。 具体可以是用户预先将该 UE设置为优先通过 E-UTRAN 接入核心网, 因此, 当 UE检测到 E-UTRAN对应的覆盖信号时, 即发起将 当前会话 TWAN切换到 E-UTRAN的流程。 当然也可以是 UE检测到当前 的 E-UTRAN的信号覆盖较好时,发起将当前会话 TWAN切换到 E-UTRAN 的流程。  S2: The UE detects an E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) and decides to switch the current session from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the user may set the UE to access the core network preferentially through the E-UTRAN in advance. Therefore, when the UE detects the coverage signal corresponding to the E-UTRAN, the process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN is initiated. Of course, the UE may initiate a process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN when the UE detects that the current E-UTRAN signal coverage is good.
S3: UE向 MME发起附着请求 Attach Request, 其中可以携带切换指 示 Handover indication, 以指示将所述用户设备的会话使用的接入网由第二 接入网 TWAN切换为第一接入网 E-UTRAN。  S3: The UE initiates an attach request Attach Request to the MME, where the handover indication Handover indication may be carried to indicate that the access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched from the second access network TWAN to the first access network E-UTRAN .
所述接收用户设备发送的切换请求消息具体可以为本发明实施例的所 述 UE向 MME发送的附着请求, 当然, 也可以为其他的用于指示将所述用 户设备的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网如 TWAN 切换为第一接入网如 E-UTRAN的请求。 The receiving the request message sent by the user equipment may be an attach request sent by the UE to the MME in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be another access network used to indicate the session of the user equipment. Switching from the second access network, such as TWAN, to the first access network, such as E-UTRAN request.
S4: MME向 HSS发送信令对 UE进行鉴权, 即包括确定该 UE是否为 签约用户的鉴权操作, 并在鉴权通过后执行下述 S5。  S4: The MME sends a signaling to the HSS to authenticate the UE, that is, the authentication operation includes determining whether the UE is a subscription user, and performing the following S5 after the authentication is passed.
S5: MME向 HSS发送更新位置请求 Update Location Request。 该请求 消息中包括 UE当前接入网络的 RAT ( Radio Access Technology, 无线接入 技术)类型, MME标识等, 以更新 UE的位置信息。 此时, 当前接入网络 的无线接入技术类型 RAT为 E-UTRAN。所述更新位置请求还用于请求 UE 对应的签约数据, 具体包括签约的 APN及 APN对应的 PDN GW标识等信 息。  S5: The MME sends an update location request Update Location Request to the HSS. The request message includes a RAT (Radio Access Technology) type, an MME identity, and the like that the UE currently accesses the network, to update the location information of the UE. At this time, the radio access technology type RAT of the current access network is E-UTRAN. The update location request is further used to request the subscription data corresponding to the UE, and specifically includes information such as the subscribed APN and the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN.
所述向所述第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息具体可以为本发明实施 例中的 MME向 HSS发送的所述更新位置请求, 当然也可以为其他的用于 向 HSS请求获取所述 UE 通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 PDN GW的标识的消息, 例如鉴权请求或更新网关请求。  The first request message sent to the first network device may be the update location request sent by the MME to the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used to request the HSS to acquire the UE. A message of the identity of the first PDN GW used by the second access network to access the core network, such as an authentication request or an update gateway request.
所述在所述第一请求消息中携带的第一指示信息具体可以为所述更新 位置请求消息中携带的 UE当前接入网络的 RAT类型。  The first indication information that is carried in the first request message may be specifically the RAT type of the UE currently accessing the network carried in the update location request message.
S6: HSS依据本地存储的 UE的切换前接入网信息, 以及更新位置请 求中的 RAT为 E-UTRAN,确定 UE的接入网由 TWAN改变为 E-UTRAN, 并且可以进一步地,确定 UE通过 TWAN接入使用的 APN与 E-UTRAN接 入的 APN不同。具体的, UE通过 WLAN接入使用的 APN可以是默认 APN 或其它 APN (即非默认 APN)。 具体的, HSS存储的 UE的切换前接入网信 息至少包括 UE 接入 TWAN 时的 RAT 类型, 即 RAT=WLAN 或 RAT=TWAN; UE通过 TWAN接入使用的 APN可以是默认 APN。  S6: The HSS determines that the access network of the UE is changed from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN according to the pre-handover access network information of the locally stored UE, and the RAT in the update location request is E-UTRAN, and may further determine that the UE passes The APN used by the TWAN access is different from the APN accessed by the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the APN used by the UE through the WLAN access may be a default APN or other APN (ie, a non-default APN). Specifically, the pre-handover access network information of the UE stored by the HSS includes at least a RAT type when the UE accesses the TWAN, that is, RAT=WLAN or RAT=TWAN; and the APN used by the UE through the TWAN access may be a default APN.
S7: HSS向 MME 回复更新位置确认消息 Update Location ACK, 消息 中可以包括 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的接入点名称 APN、 APN对 应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 PDN GW的标识、切换前接入网 信息及其它信息。 具体的, 消息中包括的 UE通过 TWAN接入网络使用的 接入点名称 APN可以是一个或多个,其中至少包括 UE通过 TWAN接入网 络使用的默认 APN; 从而消息中包括每个 APN对应的 PDN GW的标识。 PDN GW标识可以是 PDN GW地址, 或 PDN GW FQDN, 本实施例中以所 述 PDN GW的标识为 PDN GW地址进行说明; 具体的, PDN GW地址可 以是 PDN GW的 IP地址。切换前接入网信息具体可以包括前一无线接入技 术类型等信息, 这里前一无线接入技术类型为 WLAN或 TWAN, 可以采用 Previous RAT=WLAN或 Previous RAT=TWAN来表示。 S7: The HSS replies to the MME with an update location acknowledgment message Update Location ACK, where the message may include the access point name APN used by the UE when accessing the core network through the TWAN, and the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN when accessing the core network through the TWAN. Identification, access network information and other information before switching. Specifically, the UE included in the message is used by the TWAN access network. The access point name APN may be one or more, including at least a default APN used by the UE to access the network through the TWAN; thus, the message includes an identifier of the PDN GW corresponding to each APN. The PDN GW identifier may be a PDN GW address, or a PDN GW FQDN. In this embodiment, the identifier of the PDN GW is used as a PDN GW address. Specifically, the PDN GW address may be an IP address of the PDN GW. The information of the access network before the handover may include information such as the type of the previous radio access technology. Here, the type of the previous radio access technology is WLAN or TWAN, and may be represented by Previous RAT=WLAN or Previous RAT=TWAN.
所述接收的所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息具体可以为本发明 实施例中的所述 HSS发送的更新位置确认消息, 当然也可以为其他的用于 响应 S5的请求的响应消息,其中可以携带 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使 用的接入点名称 APN、 APN对应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 PDN GW的标识等信息。  The received first response message sent by the first network device may be an update location confirmation message sent by the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be other response messages for responding to the request of S5. The information such as the access point name APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN may be carried.
所述第一响应消息携带的第二指示信息具体可以为所述第一响应消息 中携带的切换前接入网信息。  The second indication information carried in the first response message may be the pre-switching access network information carried in the first response message.
S8: 由于 UE未在附着请求中提供 APN , MME依据更新位置确认消息 中切换前接入网信息, 例如前一无线接入技术类型为 TWAN的信息, 选择 更新位置确认消息中 UE在 TWAN接入网络使用的默认 APN及其对应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 PDN GW的标识所指示的 PDN GW, 作为 UE当前会话切换到所述 E-UTRAN后使用的 APN和 PDN GW。  S8: The MME does not provide the APN in the attach request, and the MME selects the information of the access network in the update location confirmation message, for example, the information of the previous radio access technology type is TWAN, and selects the UE in the TWAN access in the update location confirmation message. The PDN GW indicated by the identifier of the PDN GW used by the default APN used by the network and its corresponding UE when accessing the core network through the TWAN is used as the APN and PDN GW used after the current session of the UE is switched to the E-UTRAN.
下述的 S9至 S21为 MME得到第一 APN及其对应的第一 PDN GW标 识后, 发起的会话建立流程。  The following S9 to S21 are the session establishment procedures initiated after the MME obtains the first APN and its corresponding first PDN GW identifier.
S9: MME向 S-GW ( Serving Gateway, 服务网关 )发送建立会话请求 Create Session Request, 该请求消息中包括步骤 S8中选择的 APN以及对应 的 PDN GW的地址, 切换指示, 及其它信息。  S9: The MME sends a setup session request to the S-GW (Serving Gateway). The request message includes the APN selected in step S8 and the address, handover indication, and other information of the corresponding PDN GW.
S10: S-GW依据步骤 S9中 PDN GW地址, 向该 PDN GW发送建立会 话请求, 消息中包括切换指示及其它信息。 Sl l : 如果网络中采用了 PCC ( Policy and Charging Control , 动态策略 与计费控制;),则依据切换指示, PDN GW向 PCRF( Policy and Charging Rules Function , 策略计 费规则 功 能 实体 ) 发起 IP-CAN ( Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network , IP连接接入网络 )会话 4爹改过程, 以 获取 UE切换到新的接入网络 E-UTRAN后会话的服务质量 QoS策略与计 费规则。 S10: The S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW according to the PDN GW address in the step S9, where the message includes a handover indication and other information. Sl l : If PCC (Policy and Charging Control) is used in the network, the PDN GW initiates IP to the PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) based on the handover indication. The CAN (Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network) session 4 tampering process is performed to obtain the QoS policy and charging rules of the session after the UE switches to the new access network E-UTRAN.
S12: PDN GW向 S-GW发送建立会话响应 Create Session Response » 依据建立会话请求中的切换指示, PDN GW为 UE分配与切换前相同 (即 在 TWAN接入网络使用的 ) 的 IP地址(包括 IPv4地址, 或 IPv6前缀) , 并携带在建立会话响应消息中。  S12: The PDN GW sends a setup session response to the S-GW. According to the handover indication in the setup session request, the PDN GW allocates the same IP address (that is, used by the TWAN access network) to the UE before the handover (including IPv4). The address, or IPv6 prefix), and is carried in the setup session response message.
S13: S-GW向 MME发送建立会话响应, 其中携带 UE的 IP地址。 S13: The S-GW sends a setup session response to the MME, where the IP address of the UE is carried.
S 14: UE通过 E-UTRAN建立无线接入承载。 S 14: The UE establishes a radio access bearer through the E-UTRAN.
S15: MME向 S-GW发送修改承载请求 Modify Bearer Request,其中携 带切换指示。  S15: The MME sends a modify bearer request Modify Bearer Request to the S-GW, where the handover indication is carried.
S16:依据切换指示, S-GW向 PDN GW发送修改承载请求,使 PDN GW 将分组数据由 TWAN接入系统转到 E-UTRAN, 并立即开始向 S-GW发送 分组数据。  S16: According to the handover indication, the S-GW sends a modify bearer request to the PDN GW, so that the PDN GW transfers the packet data from the TWAN access system to the E-UTRAN, and immediately starts sending packet data to the S-GW.
S17: PDN GW向 S-GW发送修改承载响应 Modify Bearer Response 。 S17: The PDN GW sends a modify bearer response Modify Bearer Response to the S-GW.
S 18: S-GW向 MME发送修改承载响应。 S18: The S-GW sends a modify bearer response to the MME.
S19: UE开始通过 E-UTRAN发送与接收数据。  S19: The UE starts transmitting and receiving data through the E-UTRAN.
S20: 如果 UE存在多个 PDN连接, UE接着将其它 PDN连接逐一由 TWAN接入切换到 E-UTRAN。  S20: If the UE has multiple PDN connections, the UE then switches the other PDN connections one by one to the E-UTRAN by the TWAN access.
S21: PDN GW向 TWAN接入网发起资源释放过程, 以释放 TWAN接 入对应的承载资源。  S21: The PDN GW initiates a resource release process to the TWAN access network to release the corresponding bearer resource of the TWAN access.
本发明实施例披露了一个完整的 UE从第二接入网切换到第一接入网 的流程, 实现了接入网络切换前后为 UE选择同一个 PDN GW, 从而保证 UE能够使用相同的 IP地址进行会话, 避免出现数据传输中断的情况发生。 再请参见图 6,是本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的其 中另一种具体流程示意图。 本发明实施例的所述方法应用于 UE从非 3GPP 的 TWAN切换到 3GPP接入网, 其中的 MME为第三网络设备, 而 HSS则 为第一网络设备, TWAN为第二接入网, 3GPP接入网的 E-UTRAN为第一 接入网。 所述方法具体包括: The embodiment of the invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network, and implements the same PDN GW for the UE before and after the access network handover, thereby ensuring The UE can use the same IP address for the session to avoid the interruption of data transmission. Referring to FIG. 6, FIG. 6 is another schematic flowchart of another method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The method of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to handover of a UE from a non-3GPP TWAN to a 3GPP access network, where the MME is a third network device, and the HSS is a first network device, and the TWAN is a second access network, 3GPP. The E-UTRAN of the access network is the first access network. The method specifically includes:
SI : UE 连接到可信的无线接入网络 TWAN。 UE 可以通过服务于该 UE的 PDN GW与 TWAN之间的 S2a接口建立 PMIPv6( Proxy Mobile IPv6, 代理移动 IPv6协议 )或 GTP ( GPRS Tunnel Protocol, 通用分组无线业务隧 道协议 )隧道, 实现 UE与 TWAN的连接,并通过相应的 IP地址建立会话, 从而到核心网中或通过核心网进行数据访问。  SI: The UE is connected to the trusted wireless access network TWAN. The UE may establish a PMIPv6 (Proxy Mobile IPv6) or a GTP (GPRS Tunnel Protocol) tunnel through the S2a interface between the PDN GW and the TWAN serving the UE to implement the UE and the TWAN. Connect and establish a session through the corresponding IP address to access data in the core network or through the core network.
S2: UE检测到 E-UTRAN,决定将当前会话由 TWAN切换到 E-UTRAN。 具体可以是用户预先将该 UE设置为优先通过 E-UTRAN接入核心网,因此, 当 UE检测到 E-UTRAN对应的覆盖信号时, 即发起将当前会话 TWAN切 换到 E-UTRAN的流程。 当然也可以是 UE检测到当前的 E-UTRAN的信号 覆盖较好时, 发起将当前会话 TWAN切换到 E-UTRAN的流程。  S2: The UE detects the E-UTRAN and decides to switch the current session from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the user may set the UE to access the core network preferentially through the E-UTRAN in advance. Therefore, when the UE detects the coverage signal corresponding to the E-UTRAN, the process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN is initiated. Of course, when the UE detects that the current E-UTRAN signal coverage is good, the UE initiates a process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN.
S3: UE向 MME发起附着请求 Attach Request, 消息中可以携带切换 指示 Handover indication, 切换前接入网信息, 及其它信息。 具体的, 切换 前接入网信息可以包括前一无线接入技术类型等信息, 这里前一无线接入 技术类型为 WLAN或 TWAN, 可以采用 Previous RAT=WLAN或 Previous RAT=TWAN来表示。  S3: The UE initiates an attach request to the MME, and the message may carry a handover indication Handover indication, an access network information before handover, and other information. Specifically, the information about the access network before the handover may include information such as the type of the previous radio access technology, where the previous radio access technology type is WLAN or TWAN, and may be represented by Previous RAT=WLAN or Previous RAT=TWAN.
所述接收用户设备发送的切换请求消息具体可以为本发明实施例的所 述 UE向 MME发送的附着请求, 当然, 也可以为其他的用于指示将所述用 户设备的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网如 TWAN 切换为第一接入网如 E-UTRAN的请求。  The receiving the request message sent by the user equipment may be an attach request sent by the UE to the MME in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be another access network used to indicate the session of the user equipment. A request by a second access network, such as a TWAN, to a first access network, such as E-UTRAN.
所述切换请求消息携带的第二指示信息则可以为所述附着请求消息中 携带的切换指示和 /或切换前接入网信息, 当然也可以为其他的用于指示切 换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接 入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网的信息。 The second indication information carried by the handover request message may be in the attach request message. The handover indication and/or the information about the access network before the handover may be used as the other access network for indicating the use of the session before the handover, or the connection to the session. The access network is switched by the second access network to the information of the first access network.
S4: MME向 HSS发送信令对 UE进行鉴权, 即包括确定该 UE是否为 签约用户的鉴权操作, 并在鉴权通过后执行下述 S5。  S4: The MME sends a signaling to the HSS to authenticate the UE, that is, the authentication operation includes determining whether the UE is a subscription user, and performing the following S5 after the authentication is passed.
S5: MME向 HSS发送更新位置请求 Update Location Request, 该消息 中包括当前接入网络的 RAT类型, MME标识等, 以更新 UE的位置信息。 这里当前接入网络的 RAT类型为 E-UTRAN。 所述更新位置请求还用于请 求 UE对应的签约数据, 具体包括签约的 APN及 APN对应的 PDN GW标 识等信息。  S5: The MME sends an update location request Update Location Request to the HSS, where the message includes the RAT type of the current access network, the MME identity, and the like, to update the location information of the UE. Here, the RAT type of the current access network is E-UTRAN. The update location request is further used to request subscription data corresponding to the UE, and specifically includes information such as the signed APN and the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN.
由于 UE未在附着请求中提供 APN , 可选地, MME依据附着请求中的 切换指示和前一无线接入技术类型信息, 在更新位置请求中携带指示, 例 如切换指示或从 WLAN切换的指示,以使 HSS根据这一指示返回 UE通过 WLAN接入网络使用的 APN。  The MME does not provide the APN in the attach request. Optionally, the MME carries an indication, such as a handover indication or an indication of handover from the WLAN, in the update location request according to the handover indication and the previous radio access technology type information in the attach request. In order for the HSS to return the APN used by the UE to access the network through the WLAN according to this indication.
所述向所述第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息具体可以为本发明实施 例中的 MME向 HSS发送的所述更新位置请求, 当然也可以为其他的用于 向 HSS请求获取所述 UE 通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 PDN GW的标识的消息, 例如鉴权请求或更新网关请求。 所述在所述第一 请求消息中携带的第一指示信息可以为所述更新位置请求消息中携带的切 换指示或从 WLAN切换的指示, 以使 HSS 根据这一指示返回 UE通过 WLAN接入网络使用的 APN 。  The first request message sent to the first network device may be the update location request sent by the MME to the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used to request the HSS to acquire the UE. A message of the identity of the first PDN GW used by the second access network to access the core network, such as an authentication request or an update gateway request. The first indication information that is carried in the first request message may be a handover indication carried in the update location request message or an indication of handover from the WLAN, so that the HSS returns the UE to access the network through the WLAN according to the indication. The APN used.
S6: HSS确定 UE的接入网由 WLAN改变为 E-UTRAN, 并且 UE通 过 WLAN接入使用的 APN与 3GPP接入的 APN不同。 具体的, UE通过 具体的: HSS可以依据本地所存储的 UE的切换前接入网信息, 与更 新位置请求中的 RAT为 E-UTRAN, 确定 UE的接入网由 WLAN改变为 E-UTRAN; 和 /或, 根据 S5所述更新位置请求中携带的指示, 例如切换指 示或从 WLAN切换的指示,确定 UE的接入网由 WLAN改变为 E-UTRAN。 HSS存储的 UE的切换前接入网信息至少包括 UE接入 TWAN时的 RAT类 型, 即 RAT=WLAN或 RAT=TWAN。 S6: The HSS determines that the access network of the UE is changed from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN, and the APN used by the UE through the WLAN access is different from the APN accessed by the 3GPP. Specifically, the UE passes the specific: the HSS may determine, according to the pre-handover access network information of the locally stored UE, the RAT in the update location request is E-UTRAN, and determine that the access network of the UE is changed from WLAN to E-UTRAN; and/or, according to the indication carried in the update location request, such as the handover indication or the indication of handover from the WLAN, according to S5, determining that the access network of the UE is changed from WLAN to E-UTRAN. The pre-handover access network information of the UE stored by the HSS includes at least the RAT type when the UE accesses the TWAN, that is, RAT=WLAN or RAT=TWAN.
S7: HSS向 MME回复更新位置确认消息 Update Location ACK。 更新 位置确认消息中携带 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 APN、以及 APN 对应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 PDN GW标识。  S7: The HSS replies to the MME with an update location confirmation message Update Location ACK. The update location confirmation message carries the APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the PDN GW identifier used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN.
具体的, 更新位置确认消息中携带的 UE通过 TWAN接入网络使用的 接入点名称 APN可以是一个或多个,其中至少包括 UE通过 TWAN接入网 络使用的默认 APN; 从而消息中包括每个 APN对应的 PDN GW的标识。 PDN GW标识可以是 PDN GW地址, 或 PDN GW FQDN, 本实施例中以所 述 PDN GW的标识为 PDN GW地址进行说明。  Specifically, the access point name APN used by the UE in the update location confirmation message to access the network through the TWAN may be one or more, where at least the default APN used by the UE to access the network through the TWAN is included; The identifier of the PDN GW corresponding to the APN. The PDN GW identifier may be a PDN GW address or a PDN GW FQDN. In this embodiment, the identifier of the PDN GW is a PDN GW address.
所述接收的所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息具体可以为本发明 实施例中的所述 HSS发送的更新位置确认消息, 当然也可以为其他的用于 响应 S5的请求的响应消息,其中可以携带 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使 用的接入点名称 APN、 APN对应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 PDN GW的标识等信息。  The received first response message sent by the first network device may be an update location confirmation message sent by the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be other response messages for responding to the request of S5. The information such as the access point name APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN may be carried.
S8: 由于 UE未在附着请求中提供 APN , MME依据附着请求中的切换 指示和 /或切换前接入网信息, 选择更新位置确认消息中携带的 UE通过可 信 WLAN接入网络使用的默认 APN及其对应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心 网时使用的 PDN GW的标识所指示的 PDN GW, 作为 UE当前会话切换到 所述 E-UTRAN后使用的 APN和 PDN GW。  S8: The MME selects the default APN used by the UE in the update location confirmation message to access the network through the trusted WLAN, according to the handover indication in the attach request and/or the access network information before the handover. The PDN GW indicated by the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE and the corresponding UE to access the core network through the TWAN is used as the APN and the PDN GW used after the current session of the UE is switched to the E-UTRAN.
下述的 S9至 S21为 MME得到第一 APN及其对应的第一 PDN GW标 识后, 发起的会话建立流程。  The following S9 to S21 are the session establishment procedures initiated after the MME obtains the first APN and its corresponding first PDN GW identifier.
S9: MME向 S-GW发送建立会话请求 Create Session Request, 消息中 包括 S8中确定的 APN及其对应的 PDN GW的地址, 切换指示, 及其它信 息。 S9: The MME sends a setup session request Create Session Request to the S-GW, where the message includes the APN determined in S8 and the address of the corresponding PDN GW, the handover indication, and other information. Interest.
S10: S-GW依据 S9中 PDN GW地址, 向该 PDN GW发送建立会话请 求, 消息中包括切换指示及其它信息。  S10: The S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW according to the PDN GW address in S9, where the message includes a handover indication and other information.
S11. 如果网络中采用了 PCC ( Policy and Charging Control, 动态策略 与计费控制;),则依据切换指示, PDN GW向 PCRF( Policy and Charging Rules Function , 策略计 费规则 功 能 实体 ) 发起 IP-CAN ( Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network, IP连接接入网络 )会话 4爹改过程, 以 获取 UE切换到新的接入网络 E-UTRAN后会话服务质量 QoS的策略与计 费规则。  S11. If PCC (Policy and Charging Control) is adopted in the network, the PDN GW initiates IP-CAN to the PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) according to the handover indication. (Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network) The session 4 tampering process to obtain the policy and charging rules of the session quality of service QoS after the UE switches to the new access network E-UTRAN.
S12: PDN GW向 S-GW发送建立会话响应 Create Session Response » 依据建立会话请求中的切换指示, PDN GW为 UE分配与切换前相同 (即 在 TWAN接入网络使用的 ) 的 IP地址(包括 IPv4地址, 或 IPv6前缀) , 并携带在建立会话响应消息中。  S12: The PDN GW sends a setup session response to the S-GW. According to the handover indication in the setup session request, the PDN GW allocates the same IP address (that is, used by the TWAN access network) to the UE before the handover (including IPv4). The address, or IPv6 prefix), and is carried in the setup session response message.
S13: S-GW向 MME发送建立会话响应, 其中携带 UE的 IP地址。 S14: UE通过 E-UTRAN建立无线接入承载。  S13: The S-GW sends a setup session response to the MME, where the IP address of the UE is carried. S14: The UE establishes a radio access bearer through the E-UTRAN.
S15: MME向 S-GW发送修改承载请求 Modify Bearer Request,其中携 带切换指示。  S15: The MME sends a modify bearer request Modify Bearer Request to the S-GW, where the handover indication is carried.
S16:依据切换指示, S-GW向 PDN GW发送修改承载请求,使 PDN GW 将分组数据由 TWAN接入系统转到 E-UTRAN, 并立即开始向 S-GW发送 分组数据。  S16: According to the handover indication, the S-GW sends a modify bearer request to the PDN GW, so that the PDN GW transfers the packet data from the TWAN access system to the E-UTRAN, and immediately starts sending packet data to the S-GW.
S17: PDN GW向 S-GW发送修改承载响应 Modify Bearer Response 。 S17: The PDN GW sends a modify bearer response Modify Bearer Response to the S-GW.
S 18: S-GW向 MME发送修改承载响应。 S18: The S-GW sends a modify bearer response to the MME.
S19: UE开始通过 E-UTRAN发送与接收数据。  S19: The UE starts transmitting and receiving data through the E-UTRAN.
S20: 如果 UE存在多个 PDN连接, UE接着将其它 PDN连接逐一由 TWAN接入切换到 E-UTRAN。  S20: If the UE has multiple PDN connections, the UE then switches the other PDN connections one by one to the E-UTRAN by the TWAN access.
S21 : PDN GW向 TWAN接入网发起资源释放过程, 以释放 TWAN接 入对应的承载资源。 S21: The PDN GW initiates a resource release process to the TWAN access network to release the TWAN connection. Enter the corresponding bearer resource.
本发明实施例披露了一个完整的 UE从第二接入网切换到第一接入网 的流程, 实现了接入网络切换前后 为 UE选择同一个 PDN GW , 从而保证 UE能够使用相同的 IP地址进行会话, 避免出现数据传输中断的情况发生。  The embodiment of the present invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network, and implements the same PDN GW for the UE before and after the access network handover, thereby ensuring that the UE can use the same IP address. Conduct a session to avoid data transfer interruptions.
再请参见图 7 ,是本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的其 中又一种具体流程示意图。 同样, 本实施例的所述方法包括 UE从非 3GPP 网络的 TWAN切换至 3GPP网络的 E-UPRAN中, 其中的 MME为第三网 络设备, 而 HSS则为第一网络设备, 而其中的 3GPP AAA Server为第二网 络设备, TWAN为第二接入网, 3GPP接入网的 E-UTRAN为第一接入网。 所述方法具体包括:  Referring to FIG. 7, FIG. 7 is another schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. Similarly, the method in this embodiment includes the UE switching from the TWAN of the non-3GPP network to the E-UPRAN of the 3GPP network, where the MME is the third network device, and the HSS is the first network device, and wherein the 3GPP AAA is The server is the second network device, the TWAN is the second access network, and the E-UTRAN of the 3GPP access network is the first access network. The method specifically includes:
SI : UE 连接到可信的无线接入网络 TWAN。 UE 可以通过服务于该 UE的 PDN GW与 TWAN之间的 S2a接口建立 PMIPv6( Proxy Mobile IPv6, 代理移动 IPv6协议 )或 GTP ( GPRS Tunnel Protocol, 通用分组无线业务隧 道协议 )隧道, 实现 UE与 TWAN的连接,并通过相应的 IP地址建立会话, 从而到核心网中或通过核心网进行数据访问。  SI: The UE is connected to the trusted wireless access network TWAN. The UE may establish a PMIPv6 (Proxy Mobile IPv6) or a GTP (GPRS Tunnel Protocol) tunnel through the S2a interface between the PDN GW and the TWAN serving the UE to implement the UE and the TWAN. Connect and establish a session through the corresponding IP address to access data in the core network or through the core network.
S2: UE检测到 E-UTRAN,决定将当前会话由 TWAN切换到 E-UTRAN。 具体可以是用户预先将该 UE设置为优先通过 E-UTRAN接入核心网,因此, 当 UE检测到 E-UTRAN对应的覆盖信号时, 即发起将当前会话 TWAN切 换到 E-UTRAN的流程。 当然也可以是 UE检测到当前的 E-UTRAN的信号 覆盖较好时, 发起将当前会话 TWAN切换到 E-UTRAN的流程。  S2: The UE detects the E-UTRAN and decides to switch the current session from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the user may set the UE to access the core network preferentially through the E-UTRAN in advance. Therefore, when the UE detects the coverage signal corresponding to the E-UTRAN, the process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN is initiated. Of course, when the UE detects that the current E-UTRAN signal coverage is good, the UE initiates a process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN.
S3: UE向 MME发起附着 (即注册)请求 Attach Request, 消息中可 以携带切换指示, 还可以携带 APN, 用来指示 UE请求建立 (或切换)对 应于该 APN的 PDN连接, 该 APN可以是默认 APN或其它 APN (即非默认 APN)。  S3: The UE initiates an attach (ie, registration) request to the MME, and the message may carry the handover indication, and may also carry the APN, and is used to indicate that the UE requests to establish (or switch) a PDN connection corresponding to the APN, and the APN may be the default. APN or other APN (ie non-default APN).
所述接收用户设备发送的切换请求消息可以具体为本发明实施例的所 述 UE向 MME发送的附着请求, 当然, 也可以为其他的用于指示将所述用 户设备的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网如 TWAN 切换为第一接入网如 E-UTRAN的请求消息。 The receiving the request message sent by the user equipment may be the attach request sent by the UE to the MME according to the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used for indicating the use. The access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched by the second access network, such as the TWAN, to the request message of the first access network, such as E-UTRAN.
而所述切换请求消息携带的第二指示信息则具体可以为所述附着请求 中携带的切换指示, 当然也可以为其他的用于指示切换前所述会话使用的 接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入 网切换为所述第一接入网的信息。  The second indication information carried in the handover request message may specifically be the handover indication carried in the attach request, and may be another access network used to indicate the use of the session before the handover as the second An access network or information indicating that an access network used by the session is switched from the second access network to the first access network.
S4: MME向 HSS发送信令对 UE进行鉴权, 即包括确定该 UE是否为 签约用户的鉴权操作, 并在鉴权通过后执行下述 S5。  S4: The MME sends a signaling to the HSS to authenticate the UE, that is, the authentication operation includes determining whether the UE is a subscription user, and performing the following S5 after the authentication is passed.
S5: MME向 HSS发送更新位置请求 Update Location Request, 消息 中包括当前接入网络的 RAT, MME标识等,用以更新所述 UE的位置信息。 此时, 当前接入网络的 RAT为 E-UTRAN , 即 RAT=E-UTRAN。 更新位置 请求消息中还可以携带切换指示, 以及 UE在附着请求消息中提供的 APN。 所述更新位置请求还用于请求 UE对应的签约数据, 具体包括签约的 APN 及 APN对应的 PDN GW标识等信息。  S5: The MME sends an update location request Update Location Request to the HSS, where the message includes the RAT of the current access network, the MME identity, and the like, to update the location information of the UE. At this time, the RAT of the current access network is E-UTRAN, that is, RAT=E-UTRAN. The update location request message may also carry a handover indication and an APN provided by the UE in the attach request message. The update location request is further used to request the subscription data corresponding to the UE, and specifically includes information such as the subscribed APN and the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN.
所述向所述第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息具体可以为本发明实施 例中的 MME向 HSS发送的所述更新位置请求, 当然也可以为其他的用于 向 HSS请求获取所述 UE 通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 PDN GW的标识的消息, 例如鉴权请求或更新网关请求。  The first request message sent to the first network device may be the update location request sent by the MME to the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used to request the HSS to acquire the UE. A message of the identity of the first PDN GW used by the second access network to access the core network, such as an authentication request or an update gateway request.
所述在所述第一请求消息中携带的第一指示消息具体可以为所述第一 请求消息中携带的切换指示和 /或 UE当前接入网络的 RAT类型。  The first indication message that is carried in the first request message may be the handover indication carried in the first request message and/or the RAT type of the UE currently accessing the network.
S6: HSS确定 UE的接入网由 WLAN改变为 E-UTRAN, 并且可以进 一步地,确定 UE通过 WLAN接入使用的 APN与 3GPP接入的 APN不同, 或者 UE通过 WLAN接入核心网与通过 3GPP接入网接入核心网使用的 APN相同但 APN对应的 PDN GW可能不同。 具体的, UE通过 WLAN接 默认 APN或其它 APN (即非默 <  S6: The HSS determines that the access network of the UE is changed from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN, and further, it may be determined that the APN used by the UE through the WLAN access is different from the APN accessed by the 3GPP, or the UE accesses the core network through the WLAN and passes the 3GPP. The APN used by the access network to access the core network is the same but the PDN GW corresponding to the APN may be different. Specifically, the UE connects to the default APN or other APN through the WLAN (ie, non-default)
具体的: HSS可以依据本地存储的 UE的切换前接入网信息, 与更新 位置请求中的 RAT 为 E-UTRAN, 确定 UE 的接入网由 WLAN 改变为 E-UTRAN; 还可以进一步依据更新位置请求中携带的切换指示, 确定 UE 的接入网由 WLAN改变为 E-UTRAN。 HSS存储的 UE的切换前接入网信 息至少包括 UE 接入 TWAN 时的 RAT 类型, 即 RAT=WLAN 或 RAT=TWAN。 Specific: The HSS can be based on the locally stored UE's pre-switching access network information, and updated. The RAT in the location request is the E-UTRAN, and the access network of the UE is determined to be changed from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN. The access network carried in the update location request may further be determined to change the access network of the UE from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN. . The pre-handover access network information of the UE stored by the HSS includes at least the RAT type when the UE accesses the TWAN, that is, RAT=WLAN or RAT=TWAN.
S7: HSS向 3GPP AAA Server发送更新分组数据网络网关标识触发消 息 Update PDN GW Identity Trigger, 用于触发 3GPP AAA Server向 HSS更 新 UE通过 TWAN接入到核心网时使用的分组数据网络网关的标识。 更新 分组数据网络网关标识触发消息中携带用户标识; 还可以携带本地存储的 UE通过 WLAN接入网络使用的 APN , 或步骤 5 MME在更新位置请求消 息中提供的 APN。 具体的, 更新分组数据网络网关标识触发消息中的用户 标识为 IMSI ( International Mobile Subscriber Identification Number, 国际移 动用户识别码) 。  S7: The HSS sends an update packet data network gateway identifier trigger message to the 3GPP AAA Server. The Update PDN GW Identity Trigger is used to trigger the 3GPP AAA Server to update the identifier of the packet data network gateway used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN. The packet data network gateway identifier trigger message carries the user identifier; the APN that is used by the locally stored UE to access the network through the WLAN, or the APN provided by the MME in the update location request message. Specifically, the user identifier in the update packet data network gateway identifier trigger message is an IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identification Number).
S8: 3GPP AAA Server向 HSS发送更新分组数据网络网关标识请求消 息 Update PDN GW Identity Request , 其中携带 UE由 TWAN接入网接入到 核心网时的 APN及其对应的 PDN GW标识; 或依据更新分组数据网络网 关标识触发消息中的 APN, 携带 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时该 APN对 应的 PDN GW标识。  S8: The 3GPP AAA Server sends an Update Packet Data Network Gateway Identity Request message Update PDN GW Identity Request to the HSS, where the APN carrying the UE when the TWAN access network accesses the core network and its corresponding PDN GW identifier are carried; or according to the update packet The data network gateway identifies the APN in the trigger message, and carries the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN when the UE accesses the core network through the TWAN.
S9: HSS向 3GPP AAA Server发送更新分组数据网络网关标识确认消 息 Update PDN GW Identity ACK。  S9: The HSS sends an update packet data network gateway identity confirmation message Update PDN GW Identity ACK to the 3GPP AAA Server.
S10: HSS向 MME 回复更新位置确认消息 Update Location ACK。 更 新位置确认消息中包括 HSS在步骤 8接收到的 PDN GW标识,还可以包括 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 APN, 其中至少有一个 APN与 HSS 在步骤 S8接收到的 PDN GW标识相对应。具体的,与 HSS在步骤 S8接收 到的 PDN GW标识相对应的 APN , 可以是 UE通过 TWAN接入网接入核 心网时使用的默认 APN, 或与 UE在附着请求中提供的 APN相同的 APN (若 UE在附着请求中提供了 APN ) 。 S10: The HSS replies to the MME with an update location confirmation message Update Location ACK. The update location confirmation message includes the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS in step 8, and may also include an APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, where at least one APN corresponds to the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS in step S8. . Specifically, the APN corresponding to the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS in step S8 may be the default APN used when the UE accesses the core network through the TWAN access network, or the same APN as the APN provided by the UE in the attach request. (If the UE provides an APN in the attach request).
所述接收的所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息具体可以为本发明 实施例中的所述 HSS发送的更新位置确认消息, 当然也可以为其他的用于 响应 S5的请求的响应消息,其中可以携带 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使 用的接入点名称 APN、 APN对应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 PDN GW的标识等信息。  The received first response message sent by the first network device may be an update location confirmation message sent by the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be other response messages for responding to the request of S5. The information such as the access point name APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN may be carried.
Sl l : MME依据 UE在附着请求中提供的 APN和切换指示, 选择更新 位置确认消息中的与该 APN对应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 PDN GW 的标识所指示的 PDN GW , 作为 UE 当前会话切换到所述 E-UTRAN后使用的 PDN GW。 如果 UE未在附着请求中提供 APN, MME 选择更新位置确认消息中携带的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的默认 APN,及 HSS在步骤 S8接收到的该默认 APN对应的 PDN GW标识,作为 UE当前会话切换到所述 E-UTRAN后使用的 APN和 PDN GW。  S1: The MME selects, according to the APN and the handover indication provided by the UE in the attach request, the PDN GW indicated by the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN in the update location confirmation message to access the core network through the TWAN. The PDN GW used by the UE after the current session is handed over to the E-UTRAN. If the UE does not provide the APN in the attach request, the MME selects the default APN used by the UE in the update location confirmation message to access the core network through the TWAN, and the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the default APN received by the HSS in step S8. The APN and PDN GW used by the UE after the current session is switched to the E-UTRAN.
需要说明的是,如果切换前 UE已在 E-UTRAN接入网建立了相同 APN 的 PDN连接, 并使用了不同的 PDN GW , MME依据运营商策略, 可以选 择 E-UTRAN接入网中该 APN对应的 PDN GW。 这样, 由 WLAN切换到 3GPP的该 APN的 PDN连接将使用不同的 PDN GW, IP地址将发生改变, 无法实现 IP业务的无缝切换; 但可以带来其它好处, 例如避免同一个 APN 使用两个或多个 PDN GW造成的额外的带宽占用。  It should be noted that, if the UE has established a PDN connection of the same APN in the E-UTRAN access network before the handover, and uses a different PDN GW, the MME may select the APN in the E-UTRAN access network according to the operator policy. Corresponding PDN GW. In this way, the PDN connection of the APN switched to the 3GPP by the WLAN will use different PDN GWs, the IP address will change, and the IP service cannot be seamlessly switched; but other benefits can be brought about, for example, avoiding the same APN using two Or additional bandwidth usage caused by multiple PDN GWs.
下述的 S12至 S24为 MME得到第一 APN及其对应的第一 PDN GW标 识后, 发起的会话建立流程。  The following S12 to S24 are the session establishment procedures initiated after the MME obtains the first APN and its corresponding first PDN GW identifier.
S12: MME向 S-GW发送建立会话请求 Create Session Request, 消息中 包括 Sl l中确定的 APN和 PDN GW地址, 切换指示及其它信息。  S12: The MME sends a setup session request Create Session Request to the S-GW, where the message includes the APN and PDN GW addresses determined in the Sl, the handover indication, and other information.
S13: S-GW依据建立会话请求中的 PDN GW地址, 向该 PDN GW发 送建立会话请求, 消息中包括切换指示及其它信息。  S13: The S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW according to the PDN GW address in the establishment session request, where the message includes a handover indication and other information.
S 14: 如果网络中采用了 PCC ( Policy and Charging Control , 动态策略 与计费控制;),则依据切换指示, PDN GW向 PCRF( Policy and Charging Rules Function , 策略计 费规则 功 能 实体 ) 发起 IP-CAN ( Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network , IP连接接入网络 )会话 4爹改过程, 以 获取 UE切换到新的接入网络 E-UTRAN后会话的 QoS策略与计费规则。 S 14: If PCC (Policy and Charging Control) is adopted in the network And the charging control;), according to the handover indication, the PDN GW initiates an IP-CAN (Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network) session to the PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) The tampering process is to obtain the QoS policy and charging rules of the session after the UE switches to the new access network E-UTRAN.
S15: PDN GW向 S-GW发送建立会话响应 Create Session Response。 依据建立会话请求中的切换指示, PDN GW为 UE分配与切换前相同 (即 在 TWAN使用的 )的 IP地址(包括 IPv4地址, 或 IPv6前缀 ) , 并携带在 建立会话响应消息中。  S15: The PDN GW sends a session establishment response Create Session Response to the S-GW. According to the handover indication in the establishment of the session request, the PDN GW allocates the same IP address (including the IPv4 address or the IPv6 prefix) that the UE uses before the handover (that is, the T4), and carries the session response message.
S16: S-GW向 MME发送建立会话响应, 其中携带 UE的 IP地址。 S17: UE通过 E-UTRAN建立无线接入承载。  S16: The S-GW sends a setup session response to the MME, where the IP address of the UE is carried. S17: The UE establishes a radio access bearer through the E-UTRAN.
S18: MME向 S-GW发送修改承载请求 Modify Bearer Request,其中携 带切换指示。  S18: The MME sends a modify bearer request Modify Bearer Request to the S-GW, where the handover indication is carried.
S19:依据切换指示, S-GW向 PDN GW发送修改承载请求,使 PDN GW 将分组数据由 TWAN接入系统转到 E-UTRAN, 并立即开始向 S-GW发送 分组数据。  S19: According to the handover indication, the S-GW sends a modify bearer request to the PDN GW, so that the PDN GW transfers the packet data from the TWAN access system to the E-UTRAN, and immediately starts sending packet data to the S-GW.
S20: PDN GW向 S-GW发送修改承载响应 Modify Bearer Response 。 S20: The PDN GW sends a modify bearer response Modify Bearer Response to the S-GW.
S21: S-GW向 MME发送^ ί'爹改 载响应。 S21: The S-GW sends a ^ί'爹 to the MME to change the response.
S22: UE开始通过 E-UTRAN发送与接收数据。  S22: The UE starts to send and receive data through the E-UTRAN.
S23: 如果 UE存在多个 PDN连接, UE接着将其它 PDN连接逐一由 TWAN接入切换到 E-UTRAN。  S23: If the UE has multiple PDN connections, the UE then switches the other PDN connections one by one to the E-UTRAN by the TWAN access.
S24: PDN GW向 TWAN接入网发起资源释放过程, 以释放 TWAN接 入对应的承载资源。  S24: The PDN GW initiates a resource release process to the TWAN access network to release the corresponding bearer resource of the TWAN access.
需要说明的是,如果 MME选择了与切换前 WLAN接入的 PDN GW不 同的 PDN GW, 例如 S 11所述当切换前 UE已在 3GPP接入网建立了相同 APN的 PDN连接, 并使用了不同的 PDN GW时, 建立会话请求消息中将 不携带切换指示。 后续的会话建立步骤与现有的 EPS ( Evolved Packet System, 演进的分组 (通信)系统 )附着过程中 MME向 S-GW发送建立会话 请求且其中不包含切换指示的后续步骤相同。 It should be noted that, if the MME selects a PDN GW different from the PDN GW that the WLAN accesses before the handover, for example, S11, the UE has established the PDN connection of the same APN in the 3GPP access network before the handover, and uses different When the PDN GW is established, the handover request indication will not be carried in the establishment session request message. Subsequent session establishment steps with existing EPS (Evolved Packet) System, Evolved Packet (Communication) System) The subsequent steps in the attach procedure for the MME to send a setup session request to the S-GW and not including the handover indication.
本发明实施例披露了一个完整的 UE从第二接入网切换到第一接入网 的流程, 在实现了接入网络切换前后为 UE选择同一个 PDN GW, 从而保 证 UE能够使用相同的 IP地址进行会话, 避免出现数据传输中断的情况发 生。  The embodiment of the present invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network, and selects the same PDN GW for the UE before and after the access network handover, thereby ensuring that the UE can use the same IP. The address is in session to avoid a data transmission interruption.
再请参见图 8 ,是本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的方法的其 中再一种具体流程示意图。本实施例的所述方法包括 UE从非 3GPP网络的 TWAN切换至 3GPP网络的 E-UPRAN中, 其中的 MME为第三网络设备, 而 HSS则为第一网络设备, 而其中的 3GPP AAA Server为第二网络设备, TWAN为第二接入网, 3GPP接入网的 E-UTRAN为第一接入网。 所述方法 具体包括:  Referring to FIG. 8, FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of still another specific process of the method for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The method of this embodiment includes the UE switching from the TWAN of the non-3GPP network to the E-UPRAN of the 3GPP network, where the MME is the third network device, and the HSS is the first network device, and the 3GPP AAA Server is The second network device, the TWAN is the second access network, and the E-UTRAN of the 3GPP access network is the first access network. The method specifically includes:
SI : UE 连接到可信的无线接入网络 TWAN。 UE 可以通过服务于该 UE的 PDN GW与 TWAN之间的 S2a接口建立 PMIPv6( Proxy Mobile IPv6, 代理移动 IPv6协议 )或 GTP ( GPRS Tunnel Protocol, 通用分组无线业务隧 道协议 )隧道, 实现 UE与 TWAN的连接,并通过相应的 IP地址建立会话, 从而到核心网中或通过核心网进行数据访问。  SI: The UE is connected to the trusted wireless access network TWAN. The UE may establish a PMIPv6 (Proxy Mobile IPv6) or a GTP (GPRS Tunnel Protocol) tunnel through the S2a interface between the PDN GW and the TWAN serving the UE to implement the UE and the TWAN. Connect and establish a session through the corresponding IP address to access data in the core network or through the core network.
S2: UE检测到 E-UTRAN,决定将当前会话由 TWAN切换到 E-UTRAN。 具体可以是用户预先将该 UE设置为优先通过 E-UTRAN接入核心网,因此, 当 UE检测到 E-UTRAN对应的覆盖信号时, 即发起将当前会话 TWAN切 换到 E-UTRAN的流程。 当然也可以是 UE检测到当前的 E-UTRAN的信号 覆盖较好时, 发起将当前会话 TWAN切换到 E-UTRAN的流程。  S2: The UE detects the E-UTRAN and decides to switch the current session from the TWAN to the E-UTRAN. Specifically, the user may set the UE to access the core network preferentially through the E-UTRAN in advance. Therefore, when the UE detects the coverage signal corresponding to the E-UTRAN, the process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN is initiated. Of course, when the UE detects that the current E-UTRAN signal coverage is good, the UE initiates a process of switching the current session TWAN to the E-UTRAN.
S3: UE向 MME发起附着请求 Attach Request, 消息中可以携带切换 指示, 消息中还可以携带 APN, 用来指示 UE请求建立 (或切换)该 APN 所述接收用户设备发送的切换请求消息具体可以为本发明实施例的所 述 UE向 MME发送的附着请求, 当然, 也可以为其他的用于指示将所述用 户设备的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网如 TWAN 切换为第一接入网如 E-UTRAN的请求消息。 S3: The UE sends an attach request to the MME, and the message may carry the handover indication, and the message may also carry the APN, and the message may be used to indicate that the UE requests to establish (or switch) the handover request message sent by the receiving user equipment. The embodiment of the invention An attach request sent by the UE to the MME. Of course, other access networks for indicating the use of the session of the user equipment may be switched from a second access network, such as a TWAN, to a first access network, such as an E-UTRAN. Request message.
所述的第二指示信息则可以为所述附着请求中携带的切换指示, 当然 也可以为其他的用于指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网 或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网 的信息。  The second indication information may be the handover indication carried in the attach request, and may be another access network for indicating the use of the session before the handover as the second access network or indication. The access network used by the session is switched by the second access network into information of the first access network.
S4: MME向 HSS发送信令对 UE进行鉴权, 即包括确定该 UE是否为 签约用户的鉴权操作, 并在鉴权通过后执行下述 S5。  S4: The MME sends a signaling to the HSS to authenticate the UE, that is, the authentication operation includes determining whether the UE is a subscription user, and performing the following S5 after the authentication is passed.
S5: MME向 HSS发送更新位置请求 Update Location Request, 消息中 包括当前接入网络的 RAT, MME标识等, 以更新 UE的位置信息。 此时, 当前接入网络的 RAT为 E-UTRAN, 即 RAT=E-UTRAN。 HSS向 MME返 回签约数据等信息。 需要说明的是, 这一步骤与现有的 MME向 HSS更新 UE位置和获取签约数据过程相同。  S5: The MME sends an update location request Update Location Request to the HSS, where the message includes the RAT, the MME identity, and the like of the current access network, to update the location information of the UE. At this time, the RAT of the current access network is E-UTRAN, that is, RAT=E-UTRAN. The HSS returns information such as subscription data to the MME. It should be noted that this step is the same as the process in which the existing MME updates the UE location and acquires the subscription data to the HSS.
S6: MME依据签约数据和 UE的附着请求选择 PDN GW-2,并向 S-GW 发送建立会话请求, 其中携带切换指示和 PDN GW-2的地址。  S6: The MME selects the PDN GW-2 according to the subscription data and the attach request of the UE, and sends a setup session request to the S-GW, where the handover indication and the address of the PDN GW-2 are carried.
S7: S-GW向 PDN GW-2发送建立会话请求, 其中携带切换指示。 即 MME根据所述用户设备在所述 E-UTRAN 中签约的第二接入点名称和在 E-UTRAN 所述第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数据网络网关的标识选择 第二分组数据网络网关, 向所述第二分组数据网络网关发送建立会话请求 消息。  S7: The S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW-2, where the handover indication is carried. That is, the MME selects the second packet data according to the second access point name subscribed by the user equipment in the E-UTRAN and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the E-UTRAN. And the network gateway sends a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway.
S8: PDN GW-2无法识别建立会话请求中的切换指示, 因此向 S-GW 发送建立会话回复消息, 其中携带拒绝或失败原因, 表明无法执行切换, 例: ¾口 Cause=invalid handover indication (原因 =无效的切换指示)。  S8: The PDN GW-2 cannot identify the handover indication in the establishment session request, and therefore sends a setup session reply message to the S-GW, which carries the reason for the rejection or failure, indicating that the handover cannot be performed, for example: 3⁄4 port Cause=invalid handover indication (reason) = invalid switching indication).
所述第二分组数据网络网关发送的指示建立会话失败或切换失败的消 息具体可以为本发明实施例中的所述 PDN GW-2向 S-GW发送建立会话回 复消息, 当然也可以为其他的携带拒绝或失败原因、 表明无法执行切换或 建立会话失败的消息。 The message sent by the second packet data network gateway indicating that the session establishment failure or the handover failure is performed may be specifically that the PDN GW-2 in the embodiment of the present invention sends a session establishment session to the S-GW. The complex message can of course also be a message carrying the reason for the rejection or failure, indicating that the handover cannot be performed or the session is failed.
S9: S-GW将建立会话回复转发给 MME。  S9: The S-GW forwards the session reply to the MME.
S10: MME向 HSS发送网关更新请求, 以请求新的 PDN GW。 网关更 新请求中可以携带指示, 例如 "切换无法执行" 或 "请求新的 PDN GW" 指示, 还可以携带其它信息, 如: 用户标识(即 IMSI ) 、 APN、 PDN GW-2 的标识等。 具体的, 网关更新请求可以是通知请求 Notify Request, 或其它 用于请求更新分组数据网络网关、 以实现切换的消息。  S10: The MME sends a gateway update request to the HSS to request a new PDN GW. The gateway update request may carry an indication, such as "handover cannot be performed" or "request new PDN GW" indication, and may also carry other information, such as: user identity (ie, IMSI), APN, PDN GW-2 identity, and the like. Specifically, the gateway update request may be a notification request Notify Request, or another message for requesting to update the packet data network gateway to implement handover.
所述向所述第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息具体可以为本发明实施 例中的 MME向 HSS发送的所述网关更新请求, 当然也可以为其他的用于 向 HSS请求获取所述 UE 通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 PDN GW的标识的消息。  The first request message sent to the first network device may be the gateway update request sent by the MME to the HSS in the embodiment of the present invention, and may be used to request the HSS to acquire the UE. A message of the identity of the first PDN GW used when the second access network accesses the core network.
所述在所述第一请求消息中携带的第一指示信息可以为所述第一请求 消息中的 "切换无法执行" 或 "请求新的 PDN GW" 指示。  The first indication information carried in the first request message may be an indication of "switching cannot be performed" or "requesting a new PDN GW" in the first request message.
Sl l : HSS可以依据本地存储的 UE的切换前接入网信息, 和 /或网关更 新请求, 确定 UE的接入网由 WLAN改变为 E-UTRAN, 并且可以进一步 地, 确定 UE通过 WLAN接入使用的 APN与 3GPP接入的 APN不同, 或 者 UE通过 WLAN接入核心网与通过 3GPP接入网接入核心网使用的 APN 相同但 APN对应的 PDN GW可能不同。 具体的, UE通过 WLAN接入使 用的 APN可以是默认 APN或其它 APN (即非默认 APN)。 HSS存储的 UE 的切换前接入网信息至少包括 UE 接入 TWAN 时的 RAT 类型, 即 RAT=WLAN或 RAT=TWAN。  Sl l: The HSS may determine that the access network of the UE is changed from the WLAN to the E-UTRAN according to the pre-handover access network information of the locally stored UE, and/or the gateway update request, and may further determine that the UE accesses through the WLAN. The used APN is different from the APN accessed by the 3GPP, or the UE accessing the core network through the WLAN is the same as the APN used by the 3GPP access network to access the core network, but the PDN GW corresponding to the APN may be different. Specifically, the APN used by the UE through the WLAN access may be a default APN or other APN (ie, a non-default APN). The pre-handover access network information of the UE stored by the HSS includes at least the RAT type when the UE accesses the TWAN, that is, RAT=WLAN or RAT=TWAN.
PDN GW Identity Trigger, 其中携带用户标识(即 IMSI ) , 还可以携带本地 存储的 UE通过 WLAN接入网络使用的 APN,或步骤 S8 MME在通知请求 消息中提供的 APN。 S13: 3GPP AAA Server向 HSS发送更新 PDN GW标识请求消息 Update PDN GW Identity Request , 其中携带 UE由 TWAN接入网接入到核心网时 的 APN及其对应的 PDN GW标识; 或依据更新 PDN GW标识触发消息中 的 APN,携带 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时该 APN对应的 PDN GW标识。 即第一 APN和对应的第一 PDN GW的标识。The PDN GW Identity Trigger, which carries the user identifier (ie, IMSI), may also carry the locally stored APN used by the UE to access the network through the WLAN, or the APN provided by the MME in the notification request message in step S8. S13: The 3GPP AAA Server sends an Update PDN GW Identity Request message Update PDN GW Identity Request to the HSS, where the APN and the corresponding PDN GW identifier of the UE when the UE accesses the core network by the TWAN access network are carried, or the PDN GW identifier is updated according to the update The APN in the trigger message carries the PDN GW identifier corresponding to the APN when the UE accesses the core network through the TWAN. That is, the identifier of the first APN and the corresponding first PDN GW.
Figure imgf000044_0001
息 Update
Figure imgf000044_0001
Interest Update
PDN GW Identity ACK:。 PDN GW Identity ACK:.
S15: HSS向 MME 回复网关更新响应, 消息中携带 HSS在 S13接收 到的 PDN GW标识,还可以携带 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 APN , 其中至少有一个 APN与 HSS在步骤 S13接收到的 PDN GW标识相对应。 具体的, 与 HSS在步骤 S13接收到的 PDN GW标识相对应的 APN, 可以 是 UE通过 TWAN接入网接入核心网时使用的默认 APN , 或与 UE在附着 请求中提供的 APN相同的 APN (若 UE在附着请求中提供了 APN )。 具体 的, 网关更新响应可以是通知响应 Notify Answer, 或其它用于提供新的分 组数据网络网关标识、 以实现切换的消息。  S15: The HSS replies to the MME with a gateway update response, where the message carries the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS at S13, and may also carry the APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, where at least one APN and the HSS are received in step S13. The PDN GW logo corresponds. Specifically, the APN corresponding to the PDN GW identifier received by the HSS in step S13 may be a default APN used when the UE accesses the core network through the TWAN access network, or an APN that is the same as the APN provided by the UE in the attach request. (If the UE provides an APN in the attach request). Specifically, the gateway update response may be a notification response Notify Answer, or other message for providing a new packet data network gateway identifier to implement the handover.
所述接收的所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息具体可以为本发明 实施例中的所述 HSS回复的通知响应, 当然也可以为其他的用于响应 S10 的请求的响应消息, 其中可以携带 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的接 入点名称 APN、 APN对应的 UE通过 TWAN接入核心网时使用的 PDN GW 的标识等信息。  The received first response message sent by the first network device may be a notification response of the HSS reply in the embodiment of the present invention, and may also be another response message for responding to the request of S10, where The information such as the access point name APN used by the UE to access the core network through the TWAN, and the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE corresponding to the APN to access the core network through the TWAN may be carried.
下述的 S16至 S28为 MME得到第一 APN及其对应的第一 PDN GW标 识后, 发起的会话建立流程。  The following S16 to S28 are the session establishment procedures initiated after the MME obtains the first APN and its corresponding first PDN GW identifier.
S16: MME依据通知响应中的 PDN GW标识选择 PDN GW-1 , 并向 S-GW发送建立会话请求,其中携带 APN,切换指示和 PDN GW-1的地址。  S16: The MME selects the PDN GW-1 according to the PDN GW identifier in the notification response, and sends a setup session request to the S-GW, where the APN, the handover indication, and the address of the PDN GW-1 are carried.
S17: S-GW向 PDN GW-1发送建立会话请求, 其中携带切换指示。 S17: The S-GW sends a setup session request to the PDN GW-1, where the handover indication is carried.
S18: 如果网络中采用了 PCC ( Policy and Charging Control, 动态策略 与计费控制 ) , 则依据切换指示, PDN GW-1向 PCRF ( Policy and Charging Rules Function , 策略计费规则功能实体) 发起 IP-CAN ( Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network , IP连接接入网络 )会话 4爹改过程, 以 获取 UE切换到新的接入网络 E-UTRAN后会话的 QoS策略与计费规则。 S18: If PCC (Policy and Charging Control) is adopted in the network And the charging control), according to the handover indication, the PDN GW-1 initiates an IP-CAN (Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network) session to the PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) 4 tampering process to obtain the QoS policy and charging rules of the session after the UE switches to the new access network E-UTRAN.
S19: PDN GW-1向 S-GW发送建立会话响应 Create Session Response。 依据建立会话请求中的切换指示, PDN GW-1为 UE分配与切换前相同(即 在 TWAN接入网络使用的 ) 的 IP地址(包括 IPv4地址, 或 IPv6前缀) , 并携带在建立会话响应消息中。  S19: The PDN GW-1 sends a session establishment response to the S-GW, Create Session Response. According to the handover indication in establishing the session request, the PDN GW-1 allocates the same IP address (including the IPv4 address or the IPv6 prefix) that the UE is used before the handover (that is, used in the TWAN access network), and carries the session response message. in.
S20: S-GW向 MME发送建立会话响应, 其中携带 UE的 IP地址。 S21 : UE通过 E-UTRAN建立无线接入承载。  S20: The S-GW sends a setup session response to the MME, where the IP address of the UE is carried. S21: The UE establishes a radio access bearer through the E-UTRAN.
S22: MME向 S-GW发送修改承载请求 Modify Bearer Request,其中携 带切换指示。  S22: The MME sends a modify bearer request Modify Bearer Request to the S-GW, where the handover indication is carried.
S23: 依据切换指示, S-GW向 PDN GW发送修改承载请求, 使 PDN GW-1将分组数据由 TWAN接入系统转到 E-UTRAN,并立即开始向 S-GW 发送分组数据。  S23: According to the handover indication, the S-GW sends a modify bearer request to the PDN GW, so that the PDN GW-1 transfers the packet data from the TWAN access system to the E-UTRAN, and immediately starts sending packet data to the S-GW.
S24: PDN GW向 S-GW发送修改承载响应 Modify Bearer Response 。 S24: The PDN GW sends a modify bearer response Modify Bearer Response to the S-GW.
S25: S-GW向 MME发送修改承载响应。 S25: The S-GW sends a modify bearer response to the MME.
S26: UE开始通过 E-UTRAN发送与接收数据。  S26: The UE starts transmitting and receiving data through the E-UTRAN.
S27: 如果 UE存在多个 PDN连接, UE接着将其它 PDN连接逐一由 TWAN接入切换到 E-UTRAN。  S27: If the UE has multiple PDN connections, the UE then switches the other PDN connections one by one to the E-UTRAN by the TWAN access.
S28: PDN GW向 TWAN接入网发起资源释放过程, 以释放 TWAN接 入对应的承载资源。  S28: The PDN GW initiates a resource release process to the TWAN access network to release the corresponding bearer resource of the TWAN access.
本发明实施例披露了一个完整的 UE从第二接入网切换到第一接入网 的流程, 实现了接入网络切换前后为 UE选择同一个 PDN GW, 从而保证 UE能够使用相同的 IP地址进行会话, 避免出现数据传输中断的情况发生。  The embodiment of the present invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network, and implements the same PDN GW for the UE before and after the access network handover, thereby ensuring that the UE can use the same IP address. Conduct a session to avoid data transfer interruptions.
下面对本发明实施例的切换过程中选择网络设备的装置进行详细描 述。 The device for selecting a network device in the handover process of the embodiment of the present invention is described in detail below. Said.
请参见图 9 ,是本发明实施例的一种切换过程中选择网络设备的装置的 结构组成示意图。本发明实施例的所述装置可设置于 MME等具有网络设备 选择功能的设备中, 所述装置包括:  Referring to FIG. 9, FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for selecting a network device in a handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The device of the embodiment of the present invention may be disposed in a device having a network device selection function, such as an MME, where the device includes:
切换请求消息接收单元 11 , 用于接收用户设备发送的指示将所述用户 设备的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消 息;  The handover request message receiving unit 11 is configured to receive, by the user equipment, a handover request message indicating that the access network used by the session of the user equipment is switched from the second access network to the first access network;
第一获取单元 12 , 用于获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核 心网时使用的第一接入点名称;  The first obtaining unit 12 is configured to acquire a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network;
第二获取单元 13 , 用于从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第 二接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据 网络网关的标识, 所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的 网络设备, 所述管理为: 签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种; 选择单元 14, 用于选择所述获取单元获取的第一接入点名称作为所述 用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所 述获取单元获取的第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网 关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据 网络网关。  The second obtaining unit 13 is configured to acquire, from the first network device, a first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network. And the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, where the management is: one or more of subscription management, authentication management, and location management; Selecting the first access point name acquired by the acquiring unit as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and selecting the first group acquired by the acquiring unit The packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the data network gateway is used as a packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network.
用户设备 UE可以是在接收到用户的网络切换指令时,或者在检测到覆 盖信号好于所述第一接入网的第二接入网时, 生成并发送相应的指示将所 述用户设备的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请 求消息, 该切换请求消息具体用于请求进行网络切换的消息, 在所述切换 请求消息接收单元 11接收到该切换请求消息时, 即进行设备选择操作。  The user equipment UE may generate and send a corresponding indication to the user equipment when receiving the network switching instruction of the user, or when detecting that the coverage signal is better than the second access network of the first access network. The access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to a handover request message of the first access network, where the handover request message is specifically used to request a message for performing network handover, and the handover request message receiving unit 11 receives the message. When the request message is switched, the device selection operation is performed.
所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的网络设备, 例 如归属签约服务器 HSS或者鉴权服务器等, 所述管理为: 签约管理、 鉴权 管理和位置管理中的一种或多种。在 UE通过第二接入网接入核心网时,第 一网络设备中存储并管理为该 UE分配的 APN和使用的 PDN GW。 The first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment on the network side, such as a home subscription server HSS or an authentication server, and the management is: one of subscription management, authentication management, and location management. A variety. When the UE accesses the core network through the second access network, A network device allocates and manages an APN allocated to the UE and a used PDN GW.
所述第一获取单元 12获取的所述第一接入点名称可以直接从所述切换 请求消息中获取, 也就是说, UE可以在所述切换请求消息携带所述用户设 备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名称; 即第一接入 点名称可以是所述用户设备直接上报的。 或者: 所述第一接入点名称可以 从所述第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时 使用的第一接入点名称,即可以是根据用户设备 UE的标识等信息到如 HSS 等第一网络设备中请求查找后获取的。  The first access point name obtained by the first acquiring unit 12 may be directly obtained from the handover request message, that is, the UE may carry the user equipment through the second in the handover request message. The name of the first access point used by the access network to access the core network; that is, the name of the first access point may be directly reported by the user equipment. Or the first access point name may be obtained from the first network device, and the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network may be The information such as the identifier of the device UE is obtained after requesting the search in the first network device such as the HSS.
而所述第二获取单元 13获取第一分组数据网络网关即第一 PDN GW 的标识,则可以在确定了所述 UE的第一 APN后,根据 APN到第一网络设 备中获取到对应的第一 PDN GW的标识。 当然, 在其他实施例中, 也可以 根据用户设备 UE的标识从如 HSS等第一网络设备中获取, 所述第一 PDN GW的标识可以为第一 PDN GW地址,或者 PDN GW FQDN( Fully Qualified Domain Name, 全称域名 )等。  The second obtaining unit 13 obtains the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, that is, the first PDN GW, and after obtaining the first APN of the UE, the second acquiring unit 13 obtains the corresponding number according to the APN to the first network device. The identity of a PDN GW. Certainly, in other embodiments, the identifier of the user equipment UE may also be obtained from a first network device, such as an HSS, where the identifier of the first PDN GW may be a first PDN GW address, or a PDN GW FQDN (Fully Qualified) Domain Name, full name domain name, etc.
UE还是通过在第二接入网中使用的 APN和 PDN GW接入到第一接入 网, 从而实现接入到核心网中进行各类数据访问、 交互等操作。  The UE accesses the first access network through the APN and the PDN GW used in the second access network, thereby implementing access to the core network for various types of data access, interaction, and the like.
进一步具体的, 所述选择单元 14可以用于, 根据第二指示信息, 选择 所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网 后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分 组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使 用的分组数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第二指示信息指示切换前所述会话使 用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二 接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述切换请求消息和 /或所述第一响应消息 携带所述第二指示信息。  Further, the selecting unit 14 may be configured to: select, according to the second indication information, the first access point name as the connection used by the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network. a point data name, the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected as a packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to switch to the first access network, where The second indication information indicates that an access network used by the session before handover is the second access network or an access network indicating that the session is used is switched from the second access network to the first The access network, the handover request message and/or the first response message carries the second indication information.
进一步的, 如图 10所示, 图 9中的所述第二获取单元 13具体可以包 括: 第一请求消息发送子单元 131 ,用于向所述第一网络设备发送第一请求 消息, 所述第一请求消息用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网 接入核心网时使用的第一分组数据网络网关的标识; Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the second acquiring unit 13 in FIG. 9 may specifically include: a first request message sending sub-unit 131, configured to send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request that the user equipment access the core network through the second access network The identifier of the first packet data network gateway used at the time;
第一响应消息接收子单元 132 ,用于在所述第一请求消息发送子单元发 送第一请求消息之后, 接收所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息, 所述 第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分 组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。  The first response message receiving sub-unit 132 is configured to receive, after the first request message sending sub-unit sends the first request message, the first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message is at least And carrying the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, where the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
其中, 所述第一请求消息为位置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息为位置更新响应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第一 网络设备为归属签约服务器或鉴权服务器。  The first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, and the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway update response, and the first network device is a home subscription server. Or authentication server.
所述第一请求消息发送子单元 131 发送的第一请求消息中可以包括该 UE的标识或者用户信息或者 UE接入第二接入网所使用的第一 APN ( UE 直接上报的 )等, 以便于 HSS等第一网络设备能够在本地存储的 PDN GW 标识中, 查找该 UE接入第二接入网时所使用的 PDN GW的标识, 并返回 查找到的 PDN GW标识。  The first request message sent by the first request message sending sub-unit 131 may include the identifier or user information of the UE or the first APN (directly reported by the UE) used by the UE to access the second access network, etc., so that The first network device, such as the HSS, can search for the PDN GW identifier used by the UE when accessing the second access network, and return the found PDN GW identifier in the locally stored PDN GW identifier.
进一步的, 所述第一请求消息发送子单元 131 发送的第一请求消息中 携带第一指示信息, 以使所述第一网络设备至少根据所述第一指示信息确 定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网之后 执行所述发送第一响应消息的步骤, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前所述会 话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述 第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网。  Further, the first request message sent by the first request message sending sub-unit 131 carries the first indication information, so that the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, the connection used by the user equipment. Step of performing the sending of the first response message after the second access network is changed to the first access network, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is Said second access network or an access network indicating the use of said session is switched from said second access network to said first access network.
进一步的, 所述第二获取单元 13获取的第一分组数据网络网关的标识 具体由所述第一网络设备从第二网络设备获取, 所述第二网络设备为所述 用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。  Further, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway acquired by the second acquiring unit 13 is specifically acquired by the first network device from the second network device, where the second network device is the user equipment The authentication server used when the access network accesses the core network.
所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体由所述第一网络设备从第二网 络设备获取, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入 核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 即: HSS 等第一网络设备也可以在接收到所 述第一请求消息时, 根据对应的 UE的标识到如 AAA Server等用于进行鉴 权、 授权以及计费的第二网络设备中获取该 UE接入第一接入网所使用的 PDN GW 标识, 以便于第一网络设备能够根据第一请求消息返回相应的 PDN GW的标识。 The identifier of the first packet data network gateway is specifically obtained by the first network device from a second network device, where the second network device is accessed by the user equipment by using the second access network The authentication server used by the core network. That is, the first network device, such as the HSS, may also obtain the first network request from the second network device, such as the AAA Server, for authentication, authorization, and accounting, according to the identifier of the corresponding UE when receiving the first request message. The UE accesses the PDN GW identifier used by the first access network, so that the first network device can return the identifier of the corresponding PDN GW according to the first request message.
另外, 所述第一获取单元 12具体用于从所述切换请求消息中获取所述 第一接入点名称, 所述切换请求消息携带所述用户设备通过所述第二接入 网接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名称; 或者, 具体用于从所述第一网络 设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入 点名称。  In addition, the first acquiring unit 12 is specifically configured to acquire the first access point name from the handover request message, where the handover request message carries the user equipment to access the core through the second access network. The first access point name used by the network when the network device accesses the core network through the second access network is obtained from the first network device.
进一步的, 所述切换请求消息中还可以携带所述第一接入点名称, 以 使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 进而以使所述第一网络 设备根据所述第一请求消息获取与所述第一接入点名称对应的所述第一分 组数据网络网关的标识。  Further, the handover request message may further carry the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, so that the first network device is configured according to the first The first request message acquires an identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name.
本发明实施例披露了一个完整的 UE从第二接入网切换到第一接入网 的流程, 在本实施例的流程中, 通过全新的交互方式实现了接入网络切换 前后为 UE选择同一个 PDN GW, 从而使得 UE能够使用相同的 IP地址进 行会话, 避免出现数据传输中断的情况发生。  The embodiment of the present invention discloses a process for a complete UE to switch from the second access network to the first access network. In the process of the embodiment, the UE selects the same before and after the access network handover through a new interaction mode. A PDN GW, so that the UE can use the same IP address for the session to avoid the occurrence of data transmission interruption.
再请参见图 11 , 是本发明实施例的另一种切换过程中选择网络设备的 装置的结构组成示意图。本发明实施例的所述装置可设置于 MME等具有网 络设备选择功能的设备中, 包括上述的切换请求消息接收单元 11、 第一获 取单元 12、 第二获取单元 13以及选择单元 14, 进一步的, 所述装置还包 括:  Referring to FIG. 11, FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The device in the embodiment of the present invention may be disposed in a device having a network device selection function, such as an MME, including the foregoing handover request message receiving unit 11, the first obtaining unit 12, the second obtaining unit 13, and the selecting unit 14, and further The device further includes:
建立会话请求消息发送单元 15 , 用于在所述切换请求消息接收单元接 收到所述切换请求消息之后, 在所述第二获取单元获取所述第一分组数据 网络网关的标识之前, 根据所述用户设备在所述第一接入网中签约的第二 接入点名称和在所述第一接入网中所述第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数 据网络网关的标识选择第二分组数据网络网关, 向所述第二分组数据网络 网关发送建立会话请求消息; a session establishment message sending unit 15 , configured to: after the switching request message receiving unit receives the switching request message, before the second obtaining unit acquires the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, according to the User equipment signing the second in the first access network The access point name and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network select a second packet data network gateway, and send the second packet data network gateway to the second packet data network gateway Establish a session request message;
执行单元 16, 用于接收所述第二分组数据网络网关发送的指示建立会 话失败或切换失败的消息后, 通知所述第二获取单元 13从第一网络设备获 取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入 点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识。  The executing unit 16 is configured to: after receiving the message that the second packet data network gateway sends a session failure or a handover failure, notify the second acquiring unit 13 to acquire the user equipment from the first network device by using the The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used by the access network to access the core network.
本发明实施例中, 在所述切换请求消息接收单元 11接收 UE发送的指 示将会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网的切换请求消 息之后、 第二获取单元 13从第一网络设备获取与所述第一接入点名称对应 的第一分组数据网络网关的标识之前, 通过上述的建立会话请求消息发送 单元 15 , 执行单元 16首先直接得到 PDN GW的标识, 在根据 PDN GW的 标识发起会话连接不成功的情况下, 再由第一获取单元 12和第二获取单元 13进行相应的操作。  In the embodiment of the present invention, after the handover request message receiving unit 11 receives the handover request message sent by the UE indicating that the access network used by the session is switched from the second access network to the first access network, the second Before the obtaining unit 13 acquires the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name from the first network device, the execution unit 16 first directly obtains the PDN GW by using the setup session request message sending unit 15 described above. In the case that the session connection is unsuccessful according to the identifier of the PDN GW, the first obtaining unit 12 and the second obtaining unit 13 perform corresponding operations.
即: UE在接入网之间切换时, 可以先通过分配新的 APN和 PDN GW 的方式发起 UE到接入网的连接建立流程,在连接建立不成功后,再通过本 发明实施例所披露的流程获取在原接入网中使用的 PDN GW等网络设备, 确保 UE切换到另一接入网后, IP地址不会发生改变, 避免了 UE的 IP数 据流传输中断的问题。  That is, the UE initiates the connection establishment process of the UE to the access network by assigning a new APN and a PDN GW. After the connection establishment is unsuccessful, the UE is disclosed by the embodiment of the present invention. The process of obtaining the network device such as the PDN GW used in the original access network ensures that the IP address does not change after the UE switches to another access network, thereby avoiding the problem that the IP data stream transmission of the UE is interrupted.
再请参见图 12, 是本发明实施例的又一种切换过程中选择网络设备的 装置的结构组成示意图。 本发明实施例所述的装置可以设置在例如归属签 约服务器 HSS或者鉴权服务器等对所述用户设备进行管理的网络设备中, 具体的, 所述装置包括:  Referring to FIG. 12, it is a schematic structural diagram of a device for selecting a network device in another handover process according to an embodiment of the present invention. The device in the embodiment of the present invention may be configured in a network device that manages the user equipment, such as a home subscription server, an HSS, or an authentication server. Specifically, the device includes:
第一请求消息接收单元 21 , 用于接收第三网络设备发送的第一请求消 息, 所述第一请求消息为所述第三网络设备在接收到用户设备发送的指示 将会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息后发 送的, 所述第一请求消息用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网 接入核心网时使用的第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第三网络设备为 选择分组数据网络网关的网络设备; The first request message receiving unit 21 is configured to receive a first request message sent by the third network device, where the first request message is an access network that is sent by the third network device to receive the indication sent by the user equipment. Switching from the second access network to the handover request message of the first access network The first request message is used to request the identifier of the first packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network, where the third network device is a selected group Network device of the data network gateway;
第一响应消息发送单元 22 , 用于向所述第三网络设备发送第一响应消 息, 所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 以 使所述第三网络设备选择第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切 换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 并选择所述第一分组数据网络 网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换 到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第一接入点名 称为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的接入点名称, 所述第一接入点名称由所述第三网络设备从所述切换请求消息或所述第一 响应消息中获得, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名 称相对应。  The first response message sending unit 22 is configured to send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network The device selects the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selects the group indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway. The data network gateway is used as the packet data network gateway used by the user equipment to switch to the first access network, where the first access point name is the user equipment through the second connection The name of the access point used when the network accesses the core network, where the first access point name is obtained by the third network device from the handover request message or the first response message, the first packet The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
具体的, 所述第三网络设备可以为 MME等网络设备。 用户设备 UE可 以是在接收到用户的网络切换指令时, 或者在检测到覆盖信号好于所述第 一接入网的第二接入网时, 生成并发送相应的指示将所述用户设备的会话 使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息, 该切换请 求消息具体用于请求进行网络切换的消息, 例如, 如果 UE需要从非 3GPP 接入网切换至 3GPP接入网时, UE向相应的 MME发送附着请求消息( attach request ) 。  Specifically, the third network device may be a network device such as an MME. The user equipment UE may generate and send a corresponding indication to the user equipment when receiving the network switching instruction of the user, or when detecting that the coverage signal is better than the second access network of the first access network. The access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the handover request message of the first access network, where the handover request message is specifically used to request a message for performing network handover, for example, if the UE needs to switch from the non-3GPP access network. When the network accesses the 3GPP, the UE sends an attach request message (attach request) to the corresponding MME.
所述第一请求消息接收单元 21中的第一请求消息为位置更新请求或鉴 权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息对应于所述第一请求消息可以 为位置更新响应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第一网络设备为归属签 约服务器或鉴权服务器。  The first request message in the first request message receiving unit 21 is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, and the first response message may be a location update response or an authentication corresponding to the first request message. In response to the gateway or the gateway update response, the first network device is a home subscription server or an authentication server.
所述第一响应消息中的第一分组数据网络网关的标识可以是根据 UE 的标识、 用户信息、 或者 UE接入第二接入网所使用的第一 APN ( UE直接 上报的)等信息, 在本地存储的 PDN GW标识中, 查找该 UE接入第二接 入网时所使用的 PDN GW的标识, 并携带在所述第一响应消息中返回给第 三网络设备。 The identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message may be based on the identifier of the UE, the user information, or the first APN used by the UE to access the second access network. In the locally stored PDN GW identifier, the identifier of the PDN GW used by the UE to access the second access network is searched and carried in the first response message and returned to the third network device. .
当然, 所述第一响应消息中携带的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识 具体也可以从第二网络设备获取, 其中, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设 备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 即: HSS 等第一 网络设备也可以在接收到所述第一请求消息时,根据对应的 UE的标识到如 AAA Server等用于进行鉴权、 授权以及计费的第二网络设备中获取该 UE 接入第一接入网所使用的 PDN GW标识, 以便于第一网络设备能够根据第 一请求消息返回相应的 PDN GW的标识。  The identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is carried in the first response message may be specifically obtained from the second network device, where the second network device is the second device The authentication server used when accessing the core network. That is, the first network device, such as the HSS, may also obtain the first request message, according to the identifier of the corresponding UE, to the second network device, such as the AAA Server, for performing authentication, authorization, and accounting. The UE accesses the PDN GW identifier used by the first access network, so that the first network device can return the identifier of the corresponding PDN GW according to the first request message.
进一步的, 所述装置还包括:  Further, the device further includes:
确定单元 23 ,用于在所述第一响应消息发送单元 22发送所述第一响应 消息之前, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第 一接入网。 所述确定单元 23 具体用于: 在所述第一响应消息发送单元 22 发送所述第一响应消息之前, 至少根据第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使 用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网, 其中, 所述第一指示 信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会 话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述第一请求 消息携带所述第一指示信息; 或, 在所述第一响应消息发送单元 22发送所 述第一响应消息之前, 通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述 第二接入网改变为所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所 述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网。  a determining unit 23, configured to determine, before the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response message, that an access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first interface Network access. The determining unit 23 is specifically configured to: before the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response message, determine, according to the first indication information, at least the access network used by the user equipment by the second connection The access network becomes the first access network, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or an access network indicating that the session is used. Switching to the first access network by the second access network, the first request message carries the first indication information; or, the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response Before the message, determining that the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment is changed by the second access network to the first access network, determining that the access network used by the user equipment is used by the second access The network becomes the first access network.
进一步具体的, 所述第一响应消息中携带的所述第一分组数据网络网 关的标识具体可以从第二网络设备获取, 其中, 所述第二网络设备为所述 用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 所述第一 响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识包括: 所述第一响 应消息中携带所述第一接入点名称和所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识。 进一步的, 所述切换请求消息中还可以携带所述第一接入点名称, 以 使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 根据所述第一请求消息 中携带的所述第一接入点名称, 在所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一 分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一 接入点名称相对应。 Further, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is carried in the first response message may be obtained by the second network device, where the second network device is the second The authentication server used by the access network to access the core network. The identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is included in the first response message includes: the first ringtone The first access point name and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway are carried in the message. Further, the handover request message may further carry the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, and is carried according to the first request message. The first access point name carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is related to the name of the first access point correspond.
进一步的, 所述装置的所述确定单元 23 , 具体还用于:  Further, the determining unit 23 of the device is further configured to:
在所述第一响应消息发送单元 22发送所述第一响应消息之前, 确定所 述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入点名称 与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入点名称 不同; 或者,  Before the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response message, determining, by using the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network, The second access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network through the first access network is different; or
在所述第一响应消息发送单元 22发送所述第一响应消息之前, 确定所 述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入点名称与所 述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入点名称相 同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所述第一接 入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所述第二分 组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。  Before the first response message sending unit 22 sends the first response message, determine the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network, and the user equipment The second access point name used by the first access network to access the core network is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway and the user equipment access the core through the first access network The identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the network is different, and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
UE在接入网之间切换时, 可以通过本发明实施例披露的流程获取在原 接入网中使用的 PDN GW等网络设备, 确保 UE切换到另一接入网后, IP 地址不会发生改变, 避免了 UE的 IP数据流传输中断的问题。  When the UE switches between the access networks, the network device such as the PDN GW used in the original access network can be obtained through the process disclosed in the embodiment of the present invention, and the IP address does not change after the UE switches to another access network. The problem of interruption of the IP data stream transmission of the UE is avoided.
在本发明的其他实施例中, 还提供了一种计算机存储介质, 所述计算 机存储介质可存储有程序, 该程序执行时包括如上述图 1至图 8任一个对 应的方法实施例。  In other embodiments of the present invention, there is also provided a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium storing a program, the program being executed comprising an embodiment of the method corresponding to any of the above Figures 1 to 8.
在本发明的其他实施例中, 还提供了一种网络设备。 参见图 13 , 是本 发明实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构组成示意图, 本发明实施例的所述 网络设备可以为 MME等具有网络设备选择功能的设备,具体的,所述网络 设备包括: 发射器 100、接收器 200以及处理器 300,其中,所述处理器 300 执行如下步骤: In other embodiments of the invention, a network device is also provided. FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention. The network device in the embodiment of the present invention may be a device having a network device selection function, such as an MME. Specifically, the network The device includes: a transmitter 100, a receiver 200, and a processor 300, wherein the processor 300 performs the following steps:
控制所述接收器 200接收用户设备发送的指示将所述用户设备的会话 使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息;  Controlling, by the receiver 200, a handover request message sent by the user equipment to change the access network used by the session of the user equipment from the second access network to the first access network;
获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入 点名称, 从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心 网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的网络设备, 所述管 理为: 签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种;  Acquiring the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and acquiring, by the first network device, the user equipment accessing the core network through the second access network The identifier of the first packet data network gateway that is used by the first access point name, where the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment by the network side, and the management is: subscription management, One or more of authentication management and location management;
选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第 一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所 指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接 入网后使用的分组数据网络网关。  Selecting the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting the group indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway The data network gateway switches to the packet data network gateway used after the first access network as the session of the user equipment.
进一步的, 所述处理器 300执行从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通 过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一 分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤, 包括:  Further, the processor 300 performs, by acquiring, by the first network device, a first packet data network corresponding to the first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network. The steps of identifying the gateway include:
控制所述发射器 100向所述第一网络设备发送第一请求消息, 所述第 一请求消息用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时 使用的第一分组数据网络网关的标识;  Controlling the transmitter 100 to send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request to acquire the first used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network. The identity of the packet data network gateway;
控制所述接收器 200接收所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息, 所 述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一 分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。  The receiver 200 is configured to receive the first response message sent by the first network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway Corresponding to the first access point name.
其中, 所述处理器 300控制所述发射器 100向所述第一网络设备发送 第一请求消息为位置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应 消息为位置更新响应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第一网络设备为归 属签约服务器或鉴权服务器。 进一步的, 所述处理器 300还执行如下步骤: The processor 300 controls the transmitter 100 to send a first request message to the first network device as a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message is a location update response or a reference. The right response or the gateway update response, the first network device is a home subscription server or an authentication server. Further, the processor 300 further performs the following steps:
在所述第一请求消息中携带第一指示信息, 以使所述第一网络设备在 至少根据所述第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接 入网变为所述第一接入网之后, 执行所述发送第一响应消息的步骤, 所述 第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示 将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网;和 /或, 所述第一网络设备通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述 第二接入网改变为所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所 述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网之后执行所述发送第一响应消息的步 骤。  The first request message carries the first indication information, so that the first network device determines, according to the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is changed by the second access network. After the first access network, the step of sending the first response message is performed, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or the indication The access network used by the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network; and/or the first network device determines the type of radio access technology of the user equipment by using the The second access network is changed to the first access network, and determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, and the sending the first response is performed. The steps of the message.
其中, 所述处理器 300获取的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体 由所述第一网络设备从第二网络设备获取, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户 设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。  The identifier of the first packet data network gateway acquired by the processor 300 is specifically acquired by the first network device from the second network device, and the second network device is the second The authentication server used by the access network to access the core network.
进一步的, 所述处理器 300执行所述选择所述第一接入点名称作为所 述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用 户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关的步 骤具体为:  Further, the processor 300 performs the selecting the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting the first The step of the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the packet data network gateway as the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network is specifically:
根据第二指示信息, 选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所 述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数 据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会 话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 所述第二指示信息 指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使 用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述切换请求消息 和 /或所述第一响应消息携带所述第二指示信息。  And selecting, according to the second indication information, the first access point name as the access point name used by the session of the user equipment after switching to the first access network, and selecting the first packet data network gateway The packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier is used as a packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the second indication information indicates that the session is used before the handover. The access network is the second access network or the access network indicating the use of the session is switched by the second access network to the first access network, the handover request message and/or the A response message carries the second indication information.
进一步的, 所述处理器 300执行所述获取所述用户设备通过所述第二 接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名称具体为: Further, the processor 300 performs the acquiring the user equipment by using the second The name of the first access point used when the access network accesses the core network is specifically:
从所述切换请求消息中获取所述第一接入点名称, 所述切换请求消息 携带所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名 称; 或者,  Obtaining, by the handover request message, the first access point name, where the handover request message carries a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network by using the second access network; or ,
从所述第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心 网时使用的第一接入点名称。  Obtaining, by the first network device, a first access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network.
所述处理器 300控制所述接收器 200接收到的所述切换请求消息中携 带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名 称, 进而以使所述第一网络设备根据所述第一请求消息获取与所述第一接 入点名称对应的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识。  The processor 300 controls the switch request message received by the receiver 200 to carry the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, and further So that the first network device acquires an identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name according to the first request message.
所述处理器 300执行所述在所述接收用户设备发送的指示将会话使用 的接入网由第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网的切换请求消息的步骤之 后、 从第一网络设备获取与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网络 网关的标识的步骤之前, 还执行如下步骤:  The processor 300 performs the step of transmitting, by the receiving user equipment, a handover request message indicating that the access network used by the session is switched from the second access network to the first access network, from the first Before the step of acquiring, by the network device, the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name, performing the following steps:
根据所述用户设备在所述第一接入网中签约的第二接入点名称和在所 述第一接入网中所述第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数据网络网关的标识 选择第二分组数据网络网关, 向所述第二分组数据网络网关发送建立会话 请求消息;  And the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network according to the second access point name that is subscribed by the user equipment in the first access network Selecting a second packet data network gateway, and sending a setup session request message to the second packet data network gateway;
接收所述第二分组数据网络网关发送的指示建立会话失败或切换失败 的消息后, 执行所述从所述第一网络设备获取与所述第一接入点名称对应 的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤。  After receiving the message that the second packet data network gateway sends a session failure or a handover failure, performing the obtaining, by the first network device, the first packet data corresponding to the first access point name. The step of identifying the network gateway.
所述处理器 300控制所述接收器 200接收到的所述第一响应消息具体 由所述第一网络设备在如下情况下发送:  The processor 300 controls the first response message received by the receiver 200 to be specifically sent by the first network device in the following situation:
确定所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一 接入点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二 接入点名称不同; 或, 确定所述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入 点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入 点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所 述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所 述第二分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。 Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network by using the second access network, and the second used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network Access point name is different; or, Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and the second access used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network The point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different. The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
本发明实施例中, 网络侧具有网络设备选择功能的设备如 MME为 UE 选择与切换前相同的网关设备如 PDN GW , 从而保证 UE在由旧的接入网 切换到新的接入网后, 能够继续使用相同的 IP地址进行会话, 避免出现数 据传输中断的情况发生。  In the embodiment of the present invention, the device having the network device selection function on the network side, such as the MME, selects the same gateway device as the PDN GW before the handover, so as to ensure that the UE is switched from the old access network to the new access network. Ability to continue to use the same IP address for sessions to avoid data transfer interruptions.
在本发明的其他实施例中, 还提供了另一种网络设备。 参见图 14, 是 本发明实施例提供的另一种网络设备的结构组成示意图, 本发明实施例的 所述网络设备可以为 HSS等在网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的设备, 所 述管理为签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种; 本发明实施例 的所述网络设备包括: 发射器 400、 接收器 500以及处理器 600, 其中, 所 述处理器 600执行如下步骤:  In other embodiments of the invention, another network device is also provided. FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device according to an embodiment of the present invention. The network device in the embodiment of the present invention may be a device that manages the user equipment on the network side, such as an HSS. The network device of the embodiment of the present invention includes: a transmitter 400, a receiver 500, and a processor 600, where the processor 600 performs the following Steps:
控制所述接收器 500接收第三网络设备发送的第一请求消息, 所述第 一请求消息为所述第三网络设备在接收到用户设备发送的指示将会话使用 的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息后发送的, 所述 第一请求消息用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网 时使用的第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数 据网络网关的网络设备;  Controlling the receiver 500 to receive the first request message sent by the third network device, where the first request message is that the third network device receives the indication sent by the user equipment to use the access network used by the session by the second connection. After the network access is switched to the handover request message of the first access network, the first request message is used to request to acquire the first packet data used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network. An identifier of the network gateway, where the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway;
控制所述发射器 400向所述第三网络设备发送第一响应消息, 所述第 一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 以使所述第三 网络设备选择第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第 一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 并选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识 所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一 接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第一接入点名称为所述用 户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的接入点名称, 所述第一接 入点名称由所述第三网络设备从所述切换请求消息或所述第一响应消息中 获得, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。 Controlling the transmitter 400 to send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message carries at least the identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network device selects the first The access point name is used as the access point name used by the user equipment after the session is switched to the first access network, and the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected as The session of the user equipment is switched to the first a packet data network gateway used after accessing the network, where the first access point name is an access point name used by the user equipment to access the core network through the second access network, the first The access point name is obtained by the third network device from the handover request message or the first response message, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
其中, 所述处理器 600控制所述接收器 500接收的所述第一请求消息 为位置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息为位置更 新响应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数据网 络网关的网络设备。  The processor 600 controls the first request message received by the receiver 500 to be a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, where the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway. Updating the response, the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
进一步的, 所述处理器 600在控制所述发射器 400向所述第三网络设 备发送第一响应消息的步骤之前, 还包括执行如下步骤:  Further, before the step of controlling the transmitter 400 to send the first response message to the third network device, the processor 600 further includes the following steps:
确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入 网, 具体为: 至少根据第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所 述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网, 其中, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前 所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网 由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述第一请求消息携带所述第 一指示信息; 或, 通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述第二 接入网改变为所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第 二接入网变为所述第一接入网。  Determining that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, specifically: determining, according to at least the first indication information, that the access network used by the user equipment is The second access network becomes the first access network, where the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before the handover is the second access network or indicates that the session is used. The access network is switched by the second access network to the first access network, and the first request message carries the first indication information; or, by determining the type of the radio access technology of the user equipment, The second access network is changed to the first access network, and the access network used by the user equipment is determined to be changed from the second access network to the first access network.
进一步的, 所述处理器 600控制所述发射器 400发送的所述第一响应 消息中携带的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体从第二网络设备获 取, 其中, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核 心网时使用的鉴权服务器。  Further, the processor 600 controls that the identifier of the first packet data network gateway carried in the first response message sent by the transmitter 400 is specifically acquired from a second network device, where the second network The device is an authentication server used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network.
进一步的, 所述处理器 600控制所述发射器 400发送的所述第一响应 消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识包括: 所述第一响应消 息中携带所述第一接入点名称和所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识。  Further, the processor 600 is configured to control the identifier of the first packet data network gateway in the first response message sent by the transmitter 400, where: the first response message carries the first interface The entry name and the identity of the first packet data network gateway.
进一步的, 所述处理器 600还执行如下步骤: 在所述切换请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述第一请求 消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 根据所述第一请求消息中携带的所述第 一接入点名称, 在所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网 关的标识, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对 应。 Further, the processor 600 further performs the following steps: Carrying the first access point name in the handover request message, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, according to the first carried in the first request message. And an identifier of the first packet data network gateway, where the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the first access point name.
进一步的, 所述处理器 600控制所述发射器 400在所述向所述第三网 络设备发送第一响应消息的步骤之前, 还执行以下步骤:  Further, the processor 600 controls the transmitter 400 to perform the following steps before the step of sending the first response message to the third network device:
确定所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一 接入点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二 接入点名称不同; 或,  Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network by using the second access network, and the second used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network Access point name is different; or,
确定所述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入 点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入 点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所 述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所 述第二分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。  Determining, by the user equipment, the first access point name used when accessing the core network by using the second access network, and the second access used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network The point name is the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used by the user equipment when accessing the core network by using the first access network, and the second group is different. The identity of the data network gateway corresponds to the second access point name.
本发明实施例中, 网络侧对所述用户设备进行签约管理和 /或鉴权管理 和 /或位置管理的设备如 HSS等, 向网络侧具有网络设备选择功能的设备如 MME提供 UE切换前使用的 APN与网关设备如 PDN GW的标识, 从而使 网络侧具有网络设备选择功能的设备如 MME为 UE选择与切换前相同的网 关设备如 PDN GW, 保证 UE在由旧的接入网切换到新的接入网后, 能够 继续使用相同的 IP地址进行会话, 避免出现数据传输中断的情况发生。  In the embodiment of the present invention, the device that performs the subscription management and/or the authentication management and/or the location management on the network device, such as the HSS, provides the device with the network device selection function on the network side, such as the MME, to provide the UE before the handover. The APN and the identifier of the gateway device, such as the PDN GW, so that the device with the network device selection function on the network side, such as the MME, selects the same gateway device as the PDN GW for the UE before the handover, and ensures that the UE switches from the old access network to the new one. After accessing the network, the session can continue to be used with the same IP address to avoid data transmission interruption.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流 程, 是可以通过计算机程序来指令相关的硬件来完成, 所述的程序可存储 于一计算机可读取存储介质中, 该程序在执行时, 可包括如上述各方法的 实施例的流程。 其中, 所述的存储介质可为磁碟、 光盘、 只读存储记忆体 RAM )等。 A person skilled in the art can understand that all or part of the process of implementing the above embodiment method can be completed by a computer program to instruct related hardware, and the program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. In execution, the flow of an embodiment of the methods as described above may be included. The storage medium may be a magnetic disk, an optical disk, or a read-only storage memory. RAM) and so on.
以上所述仅为本发明的较佳实施例而已, 并不用以限制本发明, 凡在 本发明的精神和原则之内所作的任何修改、 等同替换和改进等, 均应携带 在本发明的保护范围之内。  The above is only the preferred embodiment of the present invention, and is not intended to limit the present invention. Any modifications, equivalent substitutions and improvements made within the spirit and principles of the present invention should be carried in the protection of the present invention. Within the scope.

Claims

权利要求 Rights request
1、一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括: 接收用户设备发送的指示将所述用户设备的会话使用的接入网由第二 接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息; 1. A method for selecting network equipment during a handover process, characterized in that the method includes: receiving an instruction sent by a user equipment to switch the access network used by the session of the user equipment from the second access network to the first access network. Access network handover request message;
获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入 点名称, 从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心 网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的网络设备, 所述管 理为: 签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种; Obtain the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network, and obtain from the first network device when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network. The identifier of the first packet data network gateway used corresponding to the name of the first access point, the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment on the network side, and the management is: subscription management, One or more of authentication management and location management;
选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第 一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所 指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接 入网后使用的分组数据网络网关。 Select the first access point name as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and select the packet indicated by the identification of the first packet data network gateway The data network gateway serves as the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network.
2、 如权利要求 1所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述从第一网络设备获取 所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点 名称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤, 包括: 2. The method according to claim 1, characterized in that: obtaining from the first network device the user equipment used when accessing the core network through the second access network and the first access point. The steps of identifying the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the name include:
向所述第一网络设备发送第一请求消息, 所述第一请求消息用于请求 获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一分组数据 网络网关的标识; Send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request to obtain the identity of the first packet data network gateway used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network. ;
接收所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息, 所述第一响应消息中至 少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的 标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。 Receive a first response message sent by the first network device, the first response message carries at least an identifier of the first packet data network gateway, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is the same as the first interface Corresponds to the entry point name.
3、 如权利要求 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一请求消息为位置 更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息为位置更新响应 网络设备为归属签约服务器或鉴权 3. The method of claim 2, wherein the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, and the first response message is a location update response. The network device is the home subscription server or authentication
4、 如权利要求 2或 3所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法还包括: 在所述第一请求消息中携带第一指示信息, 以使所述第一网络设备在 至少根据所述第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接 入网变为所述第一接入网之后, 执行所述发送第一响应消息的步骤, 所述 第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示 将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网;和 /或, 所述第一网络设备通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述 第二接入网改变为所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所 述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网之后执行所述发送第一响应消息的步 骤。 4. The method according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that, the method further includes: carrying first indication information in the first request message, so that the first network device performs the processing according to at least the After the first indication information determines that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, the step of sending the first response message is performed, and the first indication information Instructing that the access network used by the session before switching is the second access network or instructing that the access network used by the session is switched from the second access network to the first access network; and/ Or, the first network device changes the wireless access technology type of the user equipment from the second access network to the first access network, and determines that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network. The step of sending the first response message is performed after the second access network becomes the first access network.
5、 如权利要求 1~4任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一分组数据 网络网关的标识具体由所述第一网络设备从第二网络设备获取, 所述第二 网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的鉴权服 务器。 5. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the identity of the first packet data network gateway is specifically obtained by the first network device from a second network device, and the second network device It is an authentication server used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network.
6、 如权利要求 1~5任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述选择所述第一 接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的 接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网 络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组 数据网络网关具体为: 6. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the selecting the first access point name is used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network. The name of the access point, select the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway as the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network. for:
根据第二指示信息, 选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所 述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数 据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会 话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 所述第二指示信息 指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使 用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述切换请求消息 和 /或所述第一响应消息携带所述第二指示信息。 According to the second instruction information, select the first access point name as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, select the first group number The packet data network gateway indicated by the identity of the network gateway is used as the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the second indication information indicates the session before switching. The access network used is the second access network or the access network used for the session is instructed to be switched from the second access network to the first access network, the switching request message and/or The first response message carries the second indication information.
7、 如权利要求 1~6任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述获取所述用户 设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名称具体为: 从所述切换请求消息中获取所述第一接入点名称, 所述切换请求消息 携带所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名 称; 或者, 7. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the obtaining the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network is specifically: Obtain the first access point name from the handover request message, which carries the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network; or ,
从所述第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心 网时使用的第一接入点名称。 Obtain the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network through the second access network from the first network device.
8、 如权利要求 2~7任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述切换请求消息 中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一接入 点名称, 进而以使所述第一网络设备根据所述第一请求消息获取与所述第 一接入点名称对应的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识。 8. The method according to any one of claims 2 to 7, wherein the handover request message carries the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name. access point name, thereby causing the first network device to obtain the identity of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name according to the first request message.
9、 如权利要求 1~8任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述接收用户设 备发送的指示将会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网的 切换请求消息的步骤之后、 从第一网络设备获取与所述第一接入点名称对 应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤之前, 所述方法还包括: 9. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that, upon receiving the instruction sent by the user equipment, the access network used for the session is switched from the second access network to the first access network. After the step of sending the handover request message and before the step of obtaining from the first network device the identity of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name, the method further includes:
根据所述用户设备在所述第一接入网中签约的第二接入点名称和在所 述第一接入网中所述第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数据网络网关的标识 选择第二分组数据网络网关, 向所述第二分组数据网络网关发送建立会话 请求消息; According to the second access point name subscribed by the user equipment in the first access network and the identification of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network Select a second packet data network gateway, and send an establishment session message to the second packet data network gateway. request message;
接收所述第二分组数据网络网关发送的指示建立会话失败或切换失败 的消息后, 执行所述从所述第一网络设备获取与所述第一接入点名称对应 的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识的步骤。 After receiving a message sent by the second packet data network gateway indicating a failure to establish a session or a failure to switch, perform the step of obtaining the first packet data corresponding to the name of the first access point from the first network device. Steps for identifying network gateways.
10、 如权利要求 1~9任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一响应消 息具体由所述第一网络设备在如下情况下发送: 10. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the first response message is specifically sent by the first network device under the following circumstances:
确定所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一 接入点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二 接入点名称不同; 或, Determine the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network and the second access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the first access network. The access point names are different; or,
确定所述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入 点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入 点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所 述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所 述第二分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。 Determine the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network and the second access point used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the first access network. The point names are the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the first access network. The identifier of the data network gateway corresponds to the name of the second access point.
11、 一种切换过程中选择网络设备的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法包 括: 11. A method for selecting network equipment during handover, characterized in that the method includes:
接收第三网络设备发送的第一请求消息, 所述第一请求消息为所述第 三网络设备在接收到用户设备发送的指示将会话使用的接入网由第二接入 网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息后发送的, 所述第一请求消息用于请 求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一分组数 据网络网关的标识, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数据网络网关的网络设 备; Receive a first request message sent by a third network device, where the first request message is for the third network device to switch the access network used for the session from the second access network to the first after receiving an instruction sent by the user equipment. The first request message is sent after a handover request message of the access network, and the first request message is used to request to obtain the identity of the first packet data network gateway used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network, so The third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway;
向所述第三网络设备发送第一响应消息, 所述第一响应消息中至少携 带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 以使所述第三网络设备选择第一接 入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接 入点名称, 并选择所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网 络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组 数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第一接入点名称为所述用户设备通过所述第二 接入网接入核心网时使用的接入点名称, 所述第一接入点名称由所述第三 网络设备从所述切换请求消息或所述第一响应消息中获得, 所述第一分组 数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。 Send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message at least carries an identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network device selects the first connection. The access point name is used as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is selected as the access point name. The packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, wherein the name of the first access point is the access core of the user equipment through the second access network. The name of the access point used in the network, the first access point name is obtained by the third network device from the handover request message or the first response message, the identity of the first packet data network gateway Corresponds to the name of the first access point.
12、 如权利要求 11所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一请求消息为位 置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息为位置更新响 应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数据网络网 关的网络设备。 12. The method of claim 11, wherein the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, and the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway Update response, the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
13、 如权利要求 11或 12所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述向所述第三 网络设备发送第一响应消息的步骤之前, 还包括: 确定所述用户设备使用 的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网, 具体为: 13. The method according to claim 11 or 12, characterized in that, before the step of sending the first response message to the third network device, it further includes: determining that the access network used by the user equipment is provided by the user equipment. The second access network becomes the first access network, specifically:
至少根据第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接 入网变为所述第一接入网, 其中, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话 使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第 二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述第一请求消息携带所述第一指示信 息; 或, It is determined at least according to the first indication information that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, wherein the first indication information indicates the session used by the session before switching. The access network is the second access network or the access network used by the session is instructed to be switched from the second access network to the first access network, and the first request message carries the third access network. an instruction message; or,
通过确定所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述第二接入网改变为 所述第一接入网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为 所述第一接入网。 By determining that the wireless access technology type of the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, it is determined that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to The first access network.
14、 如权利要求 11~13任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一响应 消息中携带的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体从第二网络设备获 取, 其中, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核 心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 14. The method according to any one of claims 11 to 13, characterized in that, the first response The identity of the first packet data network gateway carried in the message is specifically obtained from a second network device, where the second network device is used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network. Authentication server.
15、 如权利要求 11~14任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一响应 消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识包括: 所述第一响应消 息中携带所述第一接入点名称和所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识。 15. The method according to any one of claims 11 to 14, wherein the first response message carrying at least the identification of the first packet data network gateway includes: the first response message carrying the The name of the first access point and the identification of the first packet data network gateway.
16、 如权利要求 11~15任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法还包 括: 在所述切换请求消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述第一请求 消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 根据所述第一请求消息中携带的所述第 一接入点名称, 在所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网 关的标识, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对 应。 16. The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, wherein the method further includes: carrying the first access point name in the handover request message, so that the first request message carries the first access point name, and according to the first access point name carried in the first request message, the first response message at least carries the identity of the first packet data network gateway , the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the name of the first access point.
17、 如权利要求 11~16任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述向所 述第三网络设备发送第一响应消息的步骤之前, 所述方法还包括: 17. The method according to any one of claims 11 to 16, wherein before the step of sending the first response message to the third network device, the method further includes:
确定所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一 接入点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二 接入点名称不同; 或, Determine the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network and the second access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the first access network. The access point names are different; or,
确定所述用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入 点名称与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入 点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所 述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所 述第二分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。 Determine the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network and the second access point used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the first access network. The point names are the same, but the identifier of the first packet data network gateway is different from the identifier of the second packet data network gateway used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the first access network. The identifier of the data network gateway corresponds to the name of the second access point.
18、 一种切换过程中选择网络设备的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装置包 括: 18. A device for selecting network equipment during handover, characterized in that the device includes:
切换请求消息接收单元, 用于接收用户设备发送的指示将所述用户设 备的会话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息; 第一获取单元, 用于获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心 网时使用的第一接入点名称; A handover request message receiving unit, configured to receive a handover request message sent by the user equipment instructing to switch the access network used for the session of the user equipment from the second access network to the first access network; the first acquisition unit, Obtaining the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network;
第二获取单元, 用于从第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二 接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名称对应的第一分组数据网 络网关的标识, 所述第一网络设备为网络侧对所述用户设备进行管理的网 络设备, 所述管理为: 签约管理、 鉴权管理和位置管理中的一种或多种; 选择单元, 用于选择所述获取单元获取的第一接入点名称作为所述用 户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述 获取单元获取的第一分组数据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关 作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网 络网关。 A second acquisition unit configured to acquire, from the first network device, the name of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network. Identification, the first network device is a network device that manages the user equipment on the network side, and the management is: one or more of subscription management, authentication management, and location management; a selection unit, used to select The first access point name obtained by the obtaining unit is used as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and the first packet data network obtained by the obtaining unit is selected. The packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier of the gateway is used as the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network.
19、 如权利要求 18所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第二获取单元, 包 括: 19. The device according to claim 18, characterized in that the second acquisition unit includes:
第一请求消息发送子单元, 用于向所述第一网络设备发送第一请求消 息, 所述第一请求消息用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接 入核心网时使用的第一分组数据网络网关的标识; A first request message sending subunit, configured to send a first request message to the first network device, where the first request message is used to request to obtain when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network. an identification of the first packet data network gateway used;
第一响应消息接收子单元, 用于在所述第一请求消息发送子单元发送 第一请求消息之后, 接收所述第一网络设备发送的第一响应消息, 所述第 一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一分组 数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。 The first response message receiving subunit is configured to receive the first response message sent by the first network device after the first request message sending subunit sends the first request message, and the first response message at least carries The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the name of the first access point.
20、 如权利要求 19所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一请求消息为位 置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息为位置更新响 应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第一网络设备为归属签约服务器或鉴 权服务器。 20. The device according to claim 19, wherein the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, and the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway Update response, the first network device is a home subscription server or authentication server.
21、 如权利要求 19或 20所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一请求消 息中携带第一指示信息, 以使所述第一网络设备至少根据所述第一指示信 息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入网 之后执行所述发送第一响应消息的步骤, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前所 述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由 所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网。 21. The apparatus according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the first request message carries first indication information, so that the first network device determines the user based on at least the first indication information. The step of sending a first response message is performed after the access network used by the device is changed from the second access network to the first access network, and the first indication information indicates the access network used by the session before switching. The access network is the second access network or the access network used for the session is instructed to be switched from the second access network to the first access network.
22、 如权利要求 18~21任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第二获取 单元获取的第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体由所述第一网络设备从第二 网络设备获取, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接 入核心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 22. The device according to any one of claims 18 to 21, wherein the identification of the first packet data network gateway obtained by the second obtaining unit is specifically obtained by the first network device from the second network device, The second network device is an authentication server used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network.
23、 如权利要求 18~22任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述选择单元 具体用于, 23. The device according to any one of claims 18 to 22, characterized in that the selection unit is specifically used to,
根据第二指示信息, 选择所述第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所 述会话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 选择所述第一分组数 据网络网关的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会 话切换到所述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第二指 示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网为所述第二接入网或指示将所述 会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换为所述第一接入网, 所述切换请 求消息和 /或所述第一响应消息携带所述第二指示信息。 According to the second instruction information, select the first access point name as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, select the first packet data network gateway The packet data network gateway indicated by the identifier is used as the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, wherein the second indication information indicates that the session is used before switching The access network is the second access network or the access network used for the session is instructed to be switched from the second access network to the first access network, the handover request message and/or the The first response message carries the second indication information.
24、 如权利要求 18~23任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一获取 单元具体用于从所述切换请求消息中获取所述第一接入点名称, 所述切换 请求消息携带所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的第一 接入点名称; 或者, 24. The device according to any one of claims 18 to 23, wherein the first obtaining unit is specifically configured to obtain the first access point name from the switching request message, and the switching request message Carrying the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network; or,
具体用于从所述第一网络设备获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网 接入核心网时使用的第一接入点名称。 Specifically, it is used to obtain the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network through the second access network from the first network device.
25、 如权利要求 19~24任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述切换请求 消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一 接入点名称, 进而以使所述第一网络设备根据所述第一请求消息获取与所 述第一接入点名称对应的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识。 25. The device according to any one of claims 19 to 24, wherein the handover request message carries the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name. access point name, thereby causing the first network device to obtain the identity of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the first access point name according to the first request message.
26、 如权利要求 18~25任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装置还包 括: 26. The device according to any one of claims 18 to 25, characterized in that the device further includes:
建立会话请求消息发送单元, 用于在所述切换请求消息接收单元接收 到所述切换请求消息之后, 在所述第二获取单元获取所述第一分组数据网 络网关的标识之前, 根据所述用户设备在所述第一接入网中签约的第二接 入点名称和在所述第一接入网中所述第二接入点名称对应的第二分组数据 网络网关的标识选择第二分组数据网络网关, 向所述第二分组数据网络网 关发送建立会话请求消息; A session establishment request message sending unit configured to, after the switching request message receiving unit receives the switching request message, and before the second obtaining unit obtains the identity of the first packet data network gateway, according to the user The second access point name signed by the device in the first access network and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponding to the second access point name in the first access network select the second group. The data network gateway sends a session establishment request message to the second packet data network gateway;
执行单元, 用于接收所述第二分组数据网络网关发送的指示建立会话 失败或切换失败的消息后, 通知所述第二获取单元从第一网络设备获取所 述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的与所述第一接入点名 称对应的第一分组数据网络网关的标识。 The execution unit is configured to, after receiving a message indicating a session establishment failure or a handover failure sent by the second packet data network gateway, notify the second acquisition unit to acquire the user equipment through the second interface from the first network device. The identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponding to the name of the first access point used when accessing the core network.
27、 一种切换过程中选择网络设备的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装置包 括: 27. A device for selecting network equipment during handover, characterized in that the device includes:
第一请求消息接收单元, 用于接收第三网络设备发送的第一请求消息, 所述第一请求消息为所述第三网络设备在接收到用户设备发送的指示将会 话使用的接入网由第二接入网切换为第一接入网的切换请求消息后发送 的, 所述第一请求消息用于请求获取所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接 入核心网时使用的第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第三网络设备为选 择分组数据网络网关的网络设备; The first request message receiving unit is configured to receive the first request message sent by the third network device. The first request message is the access network used by the session when the third network device receives an instruction sent by the user device. The handover request message is sent after the second access network is switched to the first access network. The first request message is used to request to obtain the third user equipment used when accessing the core network through the second access network. An identification of a packet data network gateway, the third network device is the network device that selects the packet data network gateway;
第一响应消息发送单元, 用于向所述第三网络设备发送第一响应消息, 所述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 以使所 述第三网络设备选择第一接入点名称作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到 所述第一接入网后使用的接入点名称, 并选择所述第一分组数据网络网关 的标识所指示的分组数据网络网关作为所述用户设备的所述会话切换到所 述第一接入网后使用的分组数据网络网关, 其中, 所述第一接入点名称为 所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的接入点名称, 所述 第一接入点名称由所述第三网络设备从所述切换请求消息或所述第一响应 消息中获得, 所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相 对应。 A first response message sending unit, configured to send a first response message to the third network device, where the first response message at least carries an identifier of the first packet data network gateway, so that the third network device Selecting a first access point name as the access point name used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, and selecting the packet data indicated by the identification of the first packet data network gateway The network gateway serves as the packet data network gateway used after the session of the user equipment is switched to the first access network, wherein the name of the first access point is the user equipment through the second access network. The access point name used when the network accesses the core network, the first access point name is obtained by the third network device from the handover request message or the first response message, the first packet data The identifier of the network gateway corresponds to the name of the first access point.
28、 如权利要求 27所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一请求消息为位 置更新请求或鉴权请求或网关更新请求, 所述第一响应消息为位置更新响 应或鉴权响应或网关更新响应, 所述第三网络设备为选择分组数据网络网 关的网络设备。 28. The device according to claim 27, wherein the first request message is a location update request or an authentication request or a gateway update request, and the first response message is a location update response or an authentication response or a gateway Update response, the third network device is a network device that selects a packet data network gateway.
29、 如权利要求 27或 28所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装置还包括: 确定单元, 用于在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息 之前, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接 入网。 29. The device according to claim 27 or 28, characterized in that, the device further includes: a determining unit, configured to send the first response message in the first response message sending unit Before, it is determined that the access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network.
30、如权利要求 29所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元具体用于: 在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息之前, 至少根据 第一指示信息确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述 第一接入网, 其中, 所述第一指示信息指示切换前所述会话使用的接入网 为所述第二接入网或指示将所述会话使用的接入网由所述第二接入网切换 为所述第一接入网, 所述第一请求消息携带所述第一指示信息; 或, 30. The device of claim 29, wherein the determining unit is specifically configured to: before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determine the first response message based on at least the first indication information. The access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, wherein the first indication information indicates that the access network used by the session before switching is the second access network. To access the network or instruct the access network used for the session to be switched from the second access network to the first access network, the first request message carries the first indication information; or,
在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息之前, 通过确定 所述用户设备的无线接入技术类型由所述第二接入网改变为所述第一接入 网, 确定所述用户设备使用的接入网由所述第二接入网变为所述第一接入 网。 Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, by determining that the radio access technology type of the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network, the The access network used by the user equipment is changed from the second access network to the first access network.
31、 如权利要求 27~30任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一响应 消息中携带的所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识具体从第二网络设备获 取, 其中, 所述第二网络设备为所述用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核 心网时使用的鉴权服务器。 31. The apparatus according to any one of claims 27 to 30, wherein the identity of the first packet data network gateway carried in the first response message is specifically obtained from the second network device, wherein, The second network device is an authentication server used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network.
32、 如权利要求 27~31任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一响应 消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识包括: 所述第一响应消 息中携带所述第一接入点名称和所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识。 32. The device according to any one of claims 27 to 31, wherein the first response message carrying at least the identification of the first packet data network gateway includes: the first response message carrying the The name of the first access point and the identification of the first packet data network gateway.
33、 如权利要求 27~32任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述切换请求 消息中携带所述第一接入点名称, 以使所述第一请求消息中携带所述第一 接入点名称, 根据所述第一请求消息中携带的所述第一接入点名称, 在所 述第一响应消息中至少携带所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识, 所述第一 分组数据网络网关的标识与所述第一接入点名称相对应。 33. The device according to any one of claims 27 to 32, wherein the handover request message carries the first access point name, so that the first request message carries the first access point name. Access point name, according to the first access point name carried in the first request message, where The first response message carries at least an identifier of the first packet data network gateway, and the identifier of the first packet data network gateway corresponds to the name of the first access point.
34、 如权利要求 27~33任一所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装置还包 括确定单元, 具体用于: 34. The device according to any one of claims 27 to 33, characterized in that the device further includes a determining unit, specifically used for:
在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息之前, 确定所述 用户设备通过所述第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入点名称与 所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入点名称不 同; 或者, Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, determine the first access point name used by the user equipment when accessing the core network through the second access network and the user The name of the second access point used when the device accesses the core network through the first access network is different; or,
在所述第一响应消息发送单元发送所述第一响应消息之前, 确定所述 用户设备通过第二接入网接入核心网时使用的所述第一接入点名称与所述 用户设备通过所述第一接入网接入核心网时使用的第二接入点名称相同, 但所述第一分组数据网络网关的标识与所述用户设备通过所述第一接入网 接入核心网时使用的第二分组数据网络网关的标识不同, 所述第二分组数 据网络网关的标识与所述第二接入点名称相对应。 Before the first response message sending unit sends the first response message, it is determined that the first access point name used when the user equipment accesses the core network through the second access network is the same as the first access point name used by the user equipment through the second access network. The second access point used by the first access network to access the core network has the same name, but the identity of the first packet data network gateway is the same as the user equipment's access to the core network through the first access network. The identifier of the second packet data network gateway used is different, and the identifier of the second packet data network gateway corresponds to the name of the second access point.
PCT/CN2014/071906 2013-02-08 2014-02-08 Method and device for selecting network apparatus during switching WO2014121760A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201310050277.0 2013-02-08
CN201310050277.0A CN103987092B (en) 2013-02-08 2013-02-08 The method and apparatus that the network equipment is selected in handoff procedure

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014121760A1 true WO2014121760A1 (en) 2014-08-14

Family

ID=51278890

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2014/071906 WO2014121760A1 (en) 2013-02-08 2014-02-08 Method and device for selecting network apparatus during switching

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN103987092B (en)
WO (1) WO2014121760A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105682251B (en) * 2014-11-19 2019-11-19 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for connecting network and device
MA41561A1 (en) * 2015-05-12 2018-04-30 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M Method and nodes for managing access to epc services via a non-3GPP network
WO2017024442A1 (en) * 2015-08-07 2017-02-16 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission and network access method and related device and system
WO2017113398A1 (en) * 2015-12-31 2017-07-06 华为技术有限公司 Switchover method in master-slave network, master device, slave device, and system
CN107135524A (en) * 2016-02-26 2017-09-05 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of packet data gateway, switching method and system across packet data gateway
US11089519B2 (en) * 2016-04-13 2021-08-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Migration of local gateway function in cellular networks
JP2019125822A (en) * 2016-05-17 2019-07-25 シャープ株式会社 TERMINAL DEVICE, SME(Session Management Entity) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD
CN107404736B (en) * 2016-05-18 2019-12-10 电信科学技术研究院 switching method, equipment and network architecture
JP2019149588A (en) * 2016-07-04 2019-09-05 シャープ株式会社 Terminal device, control device, gateway, and communication control method
WO2018040232A1 (en) * 2016-08-29 2018-03-08 华为技术有限公司 Switching method and device
CN107889175A (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for switching network, apparatus and system, method for network access and device
US20180103413A1 (en) * 2016-10-10 2018-04-12 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Dynamic assignment of regional network settings
CN108632953A (en) * 2017-02-10 2018-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of method and device for realizing multiple access management
CN108632892B (en) * 2017-03-24 2022-02-25 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication method, terminal, access network equipment and network system
CN109150808B (en) * 2017-06-19 2021-11-09 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, device and system
CN110366214B (en) * 2018-04-09 2021-06-15 华为技术有限公司 Network switching method and device for voice service
CN110366270B (en) * 2018-04-10 2021-08-13 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
CN110839261B (en) * 2018-08-15 2021-10-26 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and device
CN112654071B (en) * 2020-12-31 2023-10-24 广州技象科技有限公司 Method, device, equipment and storage medium for transmitting downlink data based on Internet of things
CN112398954B (en) * 2021-01-18 2021-05-04 广州技象科技有限公司 Connection management method and device based on narrowband Internet of things
CN114363882A (en) * 2021-12-31 2022-04-15 展讯半导体(成都)有限公司 Data card switching method and device

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101188553A (en) * 2007-06-22 2008-05-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for notifying home user server to store the gateway address of packet data network

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101668280B (en) * 2008-09-01 2012-07-04 华为技术有限公司 Network switching method, management equipment, terminal and home location server

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101188553A (en) * 2007-06-22 2008-05-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for notifying home user server to store the gateway address of packet data network

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
3GPP: "Architecture enhancements for non-3GPP accesses (Release 10)", 3GPP TS 23.402, March 2012 (2012-03-01) *
3GPP: "General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), enhancements for Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), access (Release 10)", 3GPP TS 23.401, March 2012 (2012-03-01) *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN103987092B (en) 2018-09-21
CN103987092A (en) 2014-08-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2014121760A1 (en) Method and device for selecting network apparatus during switching
US9686231B2 (en) Method for acquiring information and network equipment
JP5044020B2 (en) Method, system and apparatus for supporting addressing of user static IP address in LTE system
US9717019B2 (en) Data flow control method, and related device and communications system
US9019890B2 (en) Method for selecting a policy and charging rules function server on a non-roaming scene
EP2533570B1 (en) User equipment, access node and corresponding methods for maintaining multiple PDN network connections during inter-technology handover in idle mode
US9560048B2 (en) Method for updating identity information about packet gateway, AAA server and packet gateway
US8873510B2 (en) Gateway selection method, apparatus and system during heterogeneous network handover
WO2009000197A1 (en) Method and network equipment for establishing and deleting resource
WO2009006848A1 (en) Access network switching method, anchor management device, and mobile accessing device
KR20130114743A (en) Resource management for mobility between different wireless communications architectures
WO2009092304A1 (en) A method and apparatus for selecting the policy and charging rule function entity
WO2008119296A1 (en) A method and device for performing mobility management protocol negotiation
WO2009117879A1 (en) Method for indicating the bearer management of the service gateway
WO2010108420A1 (en) Method, network system and interworking function entity for processing switch of communication service
WO2009046598A1 (en) A method for establishing a dedicated bearer for a user terminal
WO2019225326A1 (en) User device, control device, and communication control method
WO2009062392A1 (en) Method of system handover, communication system and policy charging rule function entity
US9516681B2 (en) Method, device and system for accessing core network by means of non-3GPP access
WO2010111944A1 (en) Method, apparatus, policy control function and system for releasing access connections
WO2013097614A1 (en) Method and system for allocating ip address to ue, and tnan and ue
WO2011150575A1 (en) Internet protocol flow mobility method and apparatus and communication system
WO2011054244A1 (en) Method, device and system for updating packet data network gateway information

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14749351

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14749351

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1